Yamaha RX-V596RDS El manual del propietario

Categoría
Receptor
Tipo
El manual del propietario
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Malaysia ID
V471930
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
RX-V596RDS
Natural Sound AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
RX-V596RDS
G B
00RX-V596RDS-cv(ML) 2/29/0, 1:33 PM1
CAUTION
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
1. To assure the finest performance, please read this
manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future
reference.
2. Install this unit in a cool, dry, clean place — away
from windows, heat sources, sources of excessive
vibration, dust, moisture and cold. Avoid sources of
humming (transformers, motors). To prevent fire or
electrical shock, do not expose the unit to rain or
water.
3. Never open the cabinet. If something drops into the
unit, contact your dealer.
4. Do not use force on switches, controls or connection
cables. When moving the unit, first disconnect the
power cord and then the cables connected to other
component. Never pull the cables themselves.
5. The openings on the cover assure proper ventilation
of the unit. If these openings are obstructed, the
temperature inside the unit will rise rapidly.
Therefore, avoid placing objects against these
openings, and install the unit in a well-ventilated area
to prevent fire and damage.
Be sure to allow a space of at least 20 cm behind,
20 cm on both sides and 30 cm above the top panel
of the unit to prevent fire and damage.
6. The voltage used must be the same as that specified
on this unit. Using this unit with a higher voltage than
specified is dangerous and may result in fire or other
accidents. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for
any damage resulting from the use of this unit with a
voltage other than that specified.
7. Digital signals generated by this unit may interfere
with other component such as tuners, receivers and
TVs. Move this unit farther away from such
component if interference is observed.
8. Always set VOLUME to the “m” position before
starting the audio source play. Increase the volume
gradually to an appropriate level after playback has
been started.
9. Do not attempt to clean the unit with chemical
solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean,
dry cloth.
10. Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section
regarding common operating errors before
concluding that the unit is faulty.
11. When not planning to use this unit for a long period
of time (e.g., a vacation), disconnect the AC power
cord from the wall outlet.
12. To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC
power cord and disconnect the antenna cable when
there is an electrical storm.
13. Grounding or polarization — Precautions should be
taken so that the grounding or polarization of the unit
is not defeated.
14. AC outlet — Do not connect audio component to the
AC outlet on the rear panel if that component
requires more power than the outlet is rated to
provide.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source
as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this
unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby
mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a
very small quantity of power.
For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug
supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an
appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the
instructions described below.
Note
The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a
plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live
socket outlet.
Special Instructions for U.K. Model
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed
as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN
must be connected to the terminal which is marked with
the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth
terminal of the three pin plug.
0101V596RDS_caution_EN 2/29/0, 3:28 PM2
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
1
FEATURES
5-Channel Power Amplification
Minimum RMS Output
(0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz)
Main: 70 W +70 W (8 )
Center: 70 W (8 )
Rear: 70 W + 70 W (8 )
Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field
Processing
Digital Sound Field Processor (DSP)
Dolby Pro Logic Decoder
Dolby Digital Decoder
DTS Decoder
CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP
Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or
DTS
Sophisticated FM/AM Tuner
40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning
Automatic Preset Tuning
Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing)
Multi-Functions for RDS Broadcast Reception
Other Features
96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter
“SET MENU” which Provides You with 12 Items
for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video
System
Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance
Adjustment
6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future
Formats
S Video Signal Input/Output Capability
3 Optical/2 Coaxial Digital Signal Input Terminals
SLEEP Timer
Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
PREPARATION
SPEAKER SETUP....................................................... 9
CONNECTIONS........................................................ 10
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE ............ 19
BASIC OPERATION
PLAYING A SOURCE .............................................. 21
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP)
EFFECT .................................................................. 25
TUNING ..................................................................... 27
RECEIVING RDS STATIONS................................. 31
RECORDING A SOURCE ON TAPE, MD OR
VIDEO CASSETTE ............................................... 34
ADVANCED OPERATION
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM .................................... 35
SET MENU................................................................. 38
DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER
OUTPUT LEVELS ................................................. 42
SLEEP TIMER .......................................................... 44
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL .............................. 45
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................ 53
SPECIFICATIONS.................................................... 57
GLOSSARY................................................................ 58
INDEX ........................................................................ 59
INTRODUCTION
FEATURES .................................................................. 1
CONTENTS ................................................................. 1
GETTING STARTED ................................................. 2
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ............................... 4
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works.
©1992 – 1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All
rights reserved.
Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and
pending. “DTS”, “DTS Digital Surround”, are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater
Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
y indicates a tip for your operation.
When buttons on this unit and the remote control are
noted together in this Owner’s Manual, these button
names are in principle noted in the order of “button name
(remote control button name)”.
0102V596RDS01-08_EN 2/29/0, 3:28 PM1
2
GETTING STARTED
Checking the Package Contents
Check that the following items are included in your package.
Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4 type) 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter
(U.K. model only)
Indoor FM antenna
AM loop antenna
Battery Installation in the Remote
Control
1 Turn the remote control over and slide the
battery compartment cover in the direction of
the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries (AAA, R03 or UM-4 type)
according the polarity markings on the inside
of the battery compartment.
3 Close the battery compartment cover.
Battery Replacement
If the remote control operates only when it is close to the
unit, the batteries are weak. Replace all the batteries with
new ones.
Be sure to replace the batteries within about two minutes.
If it takes longer than two minutes, the codes set for the
remote control will return to the factory settings. (Refer
to pages 45 to 52 about the remote control.)
Notes
Use only AAA, R03 or UM-4 batteries for replacement.
Be sure the battery polarity is correct. (See the illustration inside
the battery compartment.)
Remove the batteries if the remote control will not be used for an
extended period of time.
If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
Quick reference card
Connection guide
1
2
3
Quick Reference Card
0102V596RDS01-08_EN 2/29/0, 3:28 PM2
3
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
Using the Remote Control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be
sure to aim the remote control directly at the infrared sensor
during operation. When the sensor is covered or there is a
large object between the remote control and the sensor, the
sensor cannot receive signals. The sensor may not be able to
receive signals properly when it is exposed to direct sunlight
or a strong artificial light (such as a fluorescent or strobe
light). In this case, change the direction of the light or
reposition the unit to avoid direct lighting.
Notes
Handle the remote control with care.
Do not spill water, tea or other liquids on the remote control.
Do not drop the remote control.
Do not leave or store the remote control in the following
conditions:
high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or
bath;
dusty places; or
extremely low temperature.
GETTING STARTED
Remote control
sensor
Within approximately 6 m
(20 feet)
0102V596RDS01-08_EN 2/29/0, 3:28 PM3
4
LR
+
+
12 3 4 65
7890qwertyu i o p a s df
6
VOLUME
Turn this control to turn up or down the volume.
7 PHONES jack
Connect the headphones to the PHONES jack. You can
listen to the sound to be output from the main speakers
through the headphones.
When listening with headphones privately, set both
SPEAKERS A and B to the OFF position, press EFFECT to
turn off the effect speakers (center and rear) and set “BASS
OUT” on the SET MENU to the MAIN position (so that no
DSP program name appears on the display).
8 SPEAKERS
Set A or B (or both A and B) to the ON position for the main
speaker system (connected to this unit) that you want to use.
Set the button(s) to the OFF position for the main speaker
system that you don’t want to use.
9 PROGRAM selector
Press l or h to select a DSP program when the effect
speakers (center and rear) are turned on. The name of the
selected program appears on the display.
0 EFFECT
Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center
and rear). If you turn them off, the signals of the center and
rear channels are directed to the right and left main speakers
when playing a source encoded with Dolby Digital and
DTS. In this case, the output levels of the right and left
speakers may not match.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front Panel
1 STANDBY/ON
Press this switch to turn on the power of this unit or to set
this unit in the standby mode. Before turning the power on,
set VOLUME to the “m” position.
Standby mode
In this mode, this unit consumes a very small quantity of
power to receive infrared-signals from the remote
control.
2 Remote control sensor
This receives signals from the remote control.
3 Display
This shows various information. (Refer to page 6 for
details.)
4 INPUT MODE
Press this button to select the input mode among AUTO,
DTS and ANALOG for the DVD/LD, TV/digital TV and
cable TV/satellite tuner sources.
5 INPUT SELECTOR
Turn this selector to select the input source (TUNER, CD,
PHONO, CBL/SAT, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV, DVD/LD) that
you want to listen to or watch. The arrow for the selected
input source indicator lights up on the display.
0102V596RDS01-08_EN 2/29/0, 3:28 PM4
5
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
q Tone controls
These controls are only effective for the sound from the
main speakers.
a) BASS
Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise
to decrease the low-frequency response. The “0” position
produces a flat response.
b) TREBLE
Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise
to decrease the high-frequency response. The “0” position
produces a flat response.
w TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER
Press this button to select a tape or an MD source. The
“TAPE/MD MONITOR” indicator lights up on the display.
When you press the button again, the “TAPE/MD
MONITOR” indicator goes off, “EXT. DECODER” appears
on the display and you can listen to a source connected to
the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals.
e BALANCE
This control is only effective for the sound from the main
speakers.
Turn the control to adjust the balance of the output volume
from the right and left main speakers to compensate for
sound imbalance caused by the speaker location or listening
room conditions.
r A/B/C/D/E
Press this button to select one of a group (A to E) of preset
stations.
t PRESET/TUNING
When “ z ” appears on the display
This button is used to select a preset station number (1 to 8).
Press h to select a higher and l to select a lower preset
station number.
When “ z ” goes off from the display
This button is used for tuning. Press h to tune in to higher
frequencies, and l to tune in to lower frequencies.
When this unit is in the PTY SEEK mode, press this button
to select a program type.
y PRESET/TUNING, EDIT
Press this button to turn on or off “ z ” on the display, and
switch the function between storing a broadcasting station
(preset tuning) and tuning. This button is also used to
exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each
other.
u FM/AM
Press this button to switch the reception band between FM
and AM.
i MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Press this button to store broadcasting stations. Hold down
this button for more than three seconds to begin automatic
preset tuning.
o TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
Press this button to switch the tuning mode between
automatic and manual. To use the automatic tuning method,
press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on
the display. To use the manual tuning method, press this
button so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off.
p RDS MODE/FREQ
When an RDS station is received, press this button to
change the display mode among the PS mode, PTY mode,
RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data
services) and/or frequency display mode in turn.
a EON
Press this button to select the desired program type (NEWS,
INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) when you want to tune in to a
radio program of that type automatically.
s PTY SEEK MODE
Press this button to set the unit in the PTY SEEK mode.
d PTY SEEK START
Press this button to begin searching for a station after the
desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK
mode.
f VIDEO AUX terminals
Connect an auxiliary audio or video input source such as a
camcorder to these terminals. If the connected video unit
has an S video output terminal, connect it to the S VIDEO
terminal to obtain a high-resolution picture. Use INPUT
SELECTOR to select the source connected to these
terminals.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
0102V596RDS01-08_EN 2/29/0, 3:28 PM5
6
Display
8 MEMORY indicator
This flashes for about five seconds after pressing
MEMORY. During this period, the displayed station can be
stored in the memory.
9 RDS mode indicators
The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently
received RDS station light(s) up. Illumination of the red
indicator next to the RDS data name shows that the
corresponding RDS mode is now selected.
0 AUTO indicator
This lights up when the unit is in the automatic tuning
mode.
q PTY HOLD indicator
This lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK
mode.
w EON indicator
This lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data
service is being received.
e Program type name indicators
The name of the selected program type lights up when the
“EON” indicator lights up.
r STEREO indicator
This lights up when an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient
signal strength is being received.
t Signal-level indicator
This indicates the signal level of the station being received.
If multipath interference is detected, the indication
decreases.
y SLEEP indicator
This lights up while the built-in SLEEP timer is on.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
1 t indicator
The “t” indicator lights up when the built-in DTS
decoder is on.
2 DSP program indicators
The name of the selected DSP program lights up in the
following cases:
When the tuner is selected as the input source.
When DSP program No. 2, 3 or the subprogram
“ENHANCED” of No. 1 is selected.
3 Multi-information display
This display shows various information: for example the
name of the selected DSP program and the various settings
during adjustment with the SET MENU. The current station
frequency and band (FM or AM) also appear when the tuner
is selected as the input source.
4 Input source indicators
One of the arrows for these indicators lights up depending
on which source is selected.
5 TAPE/MD MONITOR indicator
This lights up when the tape deck or MD recorder, etc. is
selected as the input source by pressing TAPE/MD MON /
EXT. DECODER (or TAPE/MD).
6 g and o indicators
g ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital
decoder is on. “ o ” lights up when the built-in
Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on.
7 x indicator
x ” lights up when the built-in digital sound
field processor is on.
0102V596RDS01-08_EN 2/29/0, 3:28 PM6
7
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
Remote Control
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
1
2
8
9
0
3
q
4
w
6
r
e
t
y
u
7
5
TV VOLUME
TV POWER
TV INPUT
EFFECT
Select the
AMP/TUN
position.
This section describes the basic operation of this unit with
the remote control. First, set the selector dial to the AMP/
TUN position. Refer to “PRESET REMOTE CONTROL”
on page 45 for full details.
1 DSP
Press this button to switch the function of the numeric
buttons to the DSP program selector. (Refer to page 8.)
2 Indicator window
This displays the name of components which can be
controlled.
3 Numeric buttons (Input selector buttons)
These buttons select the input source.
CD: To play a CD
TUNER: To listen to an FM (RDS) or AM broadcast
TAPE/MD: To play a tape or MD
DVD/LD: To play a DVD or LD
D-TV: To watch a TV
VCR: To play a video cassette
PHONO: To play an analog record
CBL/SAT: To watch cable TV or satellite broadcast
V-AUX: To use a camcorder
EXT. DEC.: To play another multi-channel source
Refer to page 8 for details.
4 TEST
Press this button to output the test tone for each speaker.
5 j (left), i (right)
These buttons adjust the settings of the SET MENU and
TIME/LEVEL mode.
6 TIME/LEVEL
Press this button to select the items in the TIME/LEVEL
mode.
7 SLEEP
Press this button to set the SLEEP timer.
8 INPUT
Press this button to switch the function of the numeric
buttons to the input selector. (Refer to page 8.)
9 Indicator
This flashes in red when pressing a button on the remote
control.
0 Selector dial
Turn this dial to select the position for the component to be
controlled. (The proper code must be set for your
component. Refer to “Setup codes” on page 51.) When the
position is selected, the remote control is set to that
component operation mode.
Refer to
page 8.
0102V596RDS01-08_EN 2/29/0, 3:28 PM7
8
q A/B/C/D/E, PRESET +/–
These buttons are used to select a preset station.
A/B/C/D/E: To select one of a group (A to E) of preset
stations
PRESET +/–: To select a preset station number (1 to 8)
w d (next), u (back)
These buttons are used to advance or go back one selection
on the SET MENU and TIME/LEVEL mode.
e SET MENU
Press this button to select the items on the SET MENU.
r POWER
Press this button to turn this unit on.
t STANDBY
Press this button to set this unit in the standby mode.
y VOLUME (+/–)
These buttons are used to adjust the volume level.
u MUTE
Press this button to mute the sound. To cancel mute, press
this button again.
EFFECT
Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center
and rear) in the following cases:
When the selector dial is set to the DSP/TUN position.
While the indicator is lit for about three seconds after
pressing DSP.
Description of the Numeric Buttons
The Numeric buttons function in various ways depending
on the position of the selector dial or the combination of
other instructions.
When selecting an input source
1 Press INPUT regardless of the position of the
selector dial.
The indicator lights up for about three seconds.
2 You can select an input source with the
numeric buttons while the indicator is lit.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
When selecting a DSP program
and turning on or off the effect
speakers (center and rear)
A
1 Press DSP regardless of the position of the
selector dial.
The indicator lights up for about three seconds.
2 You can select a DSP program with the
numeric buttons (1 to 8) and turn on or off the
effect speakers (center and rear) by pressing
EFFECT while the indicator is lit.
B
1 Set the selector dial to the DSP/TUN position.
2 You can select a DSP program directly with the
numeric buttons (1 to 8) and turn on or off the
effect speakers (center and rear) by pressing
EFFECT.
When selecting a preset station
number
1 Set code number “0023” in the AMP/TUN (or
DSP/TUN) position.
Refer to page 51 for setting the code.
2 Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN (or DSP/
TUN) position.
3 You can select a preset station number directly
with the numeric buttons (1 to 8).
Refer to page 29.
A
B
0102V596RDS01-08_EN 2/29/0, 3:28 PM8
9
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
SPEAKER SETUP
Speaker Placement
Refer to the following diagram when you place the
speakers.
Speakers to Be Used
This unit is designed to provide the best sound-field quality
with a 5-speaker system, using main speakers, rear speakers
and a center speaker. If you use different brands of speakers
(with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a
moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift
smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the
same manufacture or speakers with the same tonal quality.
The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus
the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from
your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for
the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for
the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it
is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without
it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.
The main speakers should be high-performance models and
have enough power-handling capacity to accept the
maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers
do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise
sound localization, however, it is ideal to use high-
performance models that can reproduce sounds over the full
range for the center speaker and the rear speakers.
Use of a subwoofer expands your
sound field
It is also possible to further expand your system with the
addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective
not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all
channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low frequency
effect) channel with high fidelity when playing back a
source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS. The YAMAHA
Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for
natural and lively bass reproduction.
Main
speaker (L)
Center speaker
Main speaker (R)
Subwoofer
Rear speaker (L)
Rear speaker (R)
1.8 m
Main speakers
Place the right and left main speakers an equal distance
from the ideal listening position. The distance of each
speaker from each side of the TV monitor should be the
same.
Rear speakers
Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing
slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet) above the
floor.
Center speaker
Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face
of your TV monitor. Place the speaker as close to the
monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the
monitor and centrally between the main speakers.
Note
If the center speaker is not used, the center channel sound will be
heard from the right and left main speakers. In that case,
“CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to the NONE position.
(Refer to page 39 for details.)
Subwoofer
The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low
bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to
place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly
toward the center of the room to reduce the wall reflections.
CAUTION
Some types of speakers interfere with a TV monitor. If
this problem occurs, move the speakers away from the
monitor. If you cannot avoid installing the center speaker
or subwoofer near the TV monitor, use magnetically
shielded speakers.
PREPARATION
0103V596RDS09-20_EN 2/29/0, 3:28 PM9
10
CONNECTIONS
Before Connecting Components
CAUTION
Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been
completed.
Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some
components require different connection methods and have different terminal names. Refer to the instructions for each
component to be connected to this unit.
When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect
it to the terminals with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this labeling system to all its products.
Use RCA-type pin plug cables for connecting audio/video components with the exception described later.
The input and output terminals for pin plugs can be distinguished as follows:
Yellow video signals (composite)
White analog audio signals for the left channel
Red analog audio signals for the right channel
coaxial digital signals
After completing all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct.
A
B
Connecting an Audio
Component (page 13)
Connecting a Video
Component (pages 14 and 15)
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
switch (page 18)
Connecting the Antenna
(pages 11 and 12)
Connecting to an External
Decoder (page 15)
Connecting the Speakers
(pages 16 and 17)
Connecting the Power
Supply Cords (page 18)
(Europe model)
V V
C C
L
R
L
R
0103V596RDS09-20_EN 2/29/0, 3:28 PM10
11
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
Connecting the Antennas
Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal
strength. However, a properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor
reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality.
Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals.
Indoor FM antenna (included)
Firmly insert the connector into the FM ANT terminal. The
indoor FM antenna is only a simple antenna. For reception
with better sound quality, installing the outdoor FM antenna
(commercially available) is recommended.
Note
Do not connect an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM
antenna at the same time.
Outdoor FM antenna
You may be unable to obtain good FM radio reception
depending on your local conditions (distance from the
broadcasting station, interposing buildings and
mountains, etc.). Consult your dealer or authorized service
center and be sure to install an antenna that suits your local
conditions.
Install the outdoor FM antenna (commercially available) in
a high place as far away from any roads as possible to avoid
being affected by automobile ignition noise.
Connecting a coaxial cable to the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna
adapter (U.K. model only)
1 Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/
300-ohm antenna adapter.
2 Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and prepare it for connection.
3 Cut the lead wire and remove it.
4 Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it
with pliers.
5 Snap the cover into place.
CONNECTIONS
75-ohm/300-ohm antenna
adapter (included for U.K.
model)
75-ohm coaxial cable
75-ohm/300-ohm antenna
adapter (included for U.K.
model)
Unit: mm
(inch)
11 (7/16)
8 (5/16)
6 (1/14)
2
3
Lead wire
Insert the wire
into the slot.
4
Clamp with
pliers.
Clamp with
pliers.
1
Cover
5
Indoor FM
antenna
0103V596RDS09-20_EN 2/29/0, 3:28 PM11
12
AM loop antenna (included)
The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and
attached to a wall, etc. However, note that the reception
sensitivity may deteriorate if the antenna is attached to a
metal or steel reinforced wall.
Notes
The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Press the tab and unlock the terminal hole.
2 Insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the
AM ANT and GND terminals.
3 Return the tab to its original position to lock
the lead wires. Lightly pull the lead wires to
confirm a good connection.
4 Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand.
5 Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best
reception is obtained.
Outdoor AM antenna
If you cannot obtain good reception with the AM loop
antenna, connect 5 m to 10 m of vinyl covered wire to the
AM ANT terminal and extend it outdoors from a window.
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect
the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good
earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth.
CONNECTIONS
1
2
3
Antenna stand
AM loop antenna
Vinyl covered wire (5 m to 10 m)
54
0103V596RDS09-20_EN 2/29/0, 3:28 PM12
13
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
Connecting an Audio Component
PHONO terminals
These terminals are used to connect a turntable with an MM
or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use an inline boosting transformer
or MC head amplifier when connecting to these terminals.
y
Connecting the ground (earth) wire of the turntable to the GND
terminal will normally minimize hum, but in some cases, better
results may be obtained with the ground wire disconnected.
CONNECTIONS
Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L),
input (IN) and output (OUT) properly.
Tape deck or
MD recorder
L R
L R
L R L R
L
R
OUTPUT
OUTPUT LINE OUT LINE IN
GND
Turntable
(Europe model)
CD player
Analog signal
Signal flow
0103V596RDS09-20_EN 2/29/0, 3:28 PM13
14
Connecting a Video Component
Audio signal terminals
Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L),
input (IN) and output (OUT) properly.
S Video signal terminals
Use a special S VIDEO cable (commercially available) for
the S VIDEO connection.
Digital audio signal terminals
If your DVD/LD player, TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite
tuner, etc. has coaxial or optical digital signal output
terminals, they can be connected to this unit’s COAXIAL
and/or OPTICAL digital signal input terminals. To make a
connection between the optical digital signal terminals,
remove the cover from each terminal, and then connect
them by using a commercially available optical fiber cable
that conforms to EIA standards. Other cables might not
function correctly.
When making connections between the digital signal
terminals, you should connect the components to the same-
named analog audio signal terminals of this unit, because a
digital signal cannot be recorded by a tape deck, MD
recorder or VCR connected to this unit.
Notes
Be sure to attach the covers when the OPTICAL terminals are not
being used in order to protect them from dust.
If your LD player has a Dolby Digital RF signal output terminal,
be sure to use the RF demodulator (separately purchased).
No sound will be heard when connecting your LD players Dolby
Digital RF signal output terminal directly to this unit’s COAXIAL
DVD/LD digital signal input terminal.
y
The input signal from the DVD/LD or CBL/SAT input terminals
is selected in the following order of priority with the input mode
set to AUTO: COAXIAL terminal OPTICAL terminal
Analog terminal. Refer to page 23 for details.
All digital signal input terminals are applicable to sampling
frequencies of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz and 96 kHz. (Refer to
page 24 about 96-kHz sampling 24-bit digital signals.)
CONNECTIONS
L R
L
R
C
C
L R
L R
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO
IN
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT
S VIDEO
IN
S VIDEO
OUT
S VIDEO
IN
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT
O
O
O
S S
S
SS
S
L R
L R
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT
O
S
C
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
DVD/LD player Cable TV/satellite tuner
(Europe model)
Analog signal
S Video signal
Digital signal
(optical)
Digital signal
(coaxial)
Signal flow
TV monitor
TV/digital TV
VCR
0103V596RDS09-20_EN 2/29/0, 3:28 PM14
15
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
VIDEO terminals (composite)
If your video components do not have “S” video terminals,
they can be connected to this unit’s VIDEO terminals. Be
sure to connect the input (IN) and output (OUT) properly.
Note
If video signals are input from both the S VIDEO input and
composite input terminals, the signals will be directed to their
respective output terminals.
TV monitor with a 21-pin connector
Make a connection as shown above with a commercially available SCART-plug connector cable.
VIDEO AUX terminals (on the front panel)
These terminals are used to connect any video input source
such as a camcorder to this unit.
Connecting to an External Decoder
This unit has additional 6-channel audio signal input
terminals for connecting an external decoder to this unit.
Connect the 6-channel audio signal output terminals of the
decoder to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals
of this unit.
Notes
When a source connected to these terminals is selected, the digital
sound field processor cannot be used.
The settings of “CENTER SP”, “REAR SP”, “MAIN SP” and
“BASS OUT” on the SET MENU have no effect on a source
connected to these terminals. The setting of “MAIN LVL” is
effective. (Refer to pages 39 and 40 for details.)
Adjustment of the output level of the center speaker, rear speakers
and subwoofer is effective when a source connected to these
terminals is selected as the input source. (Refer to page 42 for
details.)
CONNECTIONS
L R
V
AUDIO OUT R
AUDIO OUT L
VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO OUT
S
DVD/LD player
L R L R
MAIN
OUT
SURROUND
OUT
CENTER
OUT
SUBWOOFER
OUT
External decoder
(Europe model)
V
V
VIDEO
IN
V
L R
V
VIDEO OUT
V
VIDEO OUT
V
VIDEO
OUT
V
VIDEO
OUT
V
VIDEO
IN
Cable TV/satellite tuner
TV/digital TV VCR
SCART-
plug
No
connection
Video signal
Signal flow
Camcorder
TV monitor
0103V596RDS09-20_EN 2/29/0, 3:29 PM15
16
Connecting the Speakers
Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L),
“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are
faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the
polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound
will be unnatural and lack bass.
CAUTIONS
Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on
the rear panel of this unit.
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and
do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This
could damage the unit and/or speakers.
MAIN SPEAKERS terminals
One or two speaker systems can be connected to these
terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to
either of the SPEAKERS A or B terminals.
REAR SPEAKERS terminals
A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals.
CENTER SPEAKER terminals
A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.
CONNECTIONS
R
L
Main speakers A
Right Left
Main speakers B
Right Left
(Europe model)
Center speaker Rear speakers
Right Left
Subwoofer connection
When using a subwoofer with built-
in amplifier, including the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing
Subwoofer System, connect the
input terminal of the subwoofer
system to the SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT terminal of this unit.
Low bass signals distributed from
the main, center and/or rear
channels are directed to this
terminal. (The cut-off frequency of
this terminals is 90 Hz.) The LFE
(low frequency effect) signals
generated when Dolby Digital or
DTS is decoded are also directed if
they are assigned to this terminal.
Subwoofer
system
0103V596RDS09-20_EN 2/29/0, 3:29 PM16
17
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
Speaker cables
1 Remove approx. 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation
from each of the speaker cables.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together
to prevent short circuits.
Connecting to the MAIN SPEAKERS terminals
1 Unscrew the knob.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of
each terminal.
3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
Connecting to the REAR and CENTER SPEAKERS terminals
1 Open the tab.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each
terminal.
3 Return the tab to secure the wire.
Connecting to an external amplifier
The speaker connections described on page 16 are fine for most applications. If you wish to drive your existing amplifier, the
following terminals are available for connecting an external amplifier(s) to this unit.
Note
Output signals from these terminals are affected by the use of VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE.
CONNECTIONS
2
1
3
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
2
3
1
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
1 MAIN OUTPUT terminals
These terminals are for the main channel line output.
Connect the input terminals of the external amplifier to
these terminals.
2 CENTER OUTPUT terminals
These terminals are for the center channel line output.
Connect the input terminals of the external amplifier to
these terminals.
3 REAR (SURROUND) OUTPUT terminals
These terminals are for the rear channel line output.
Connect the input terminals of the external amplifier to
these terminals.
Note
If an external amplifier is connected to the MAIN, CENTER or
REAR OUTPUT terminals, disconnect the corresponding
speakers (main, center or rear) from the SPEAKERS terminals.
1
23
12
10 mm (3/8”)
(Europe model)
0103V596RDS09-20_EN 2/29/0, 3:29 PM17
18
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch
WARNING
Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise the unit may be
damaged.
If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not
be fully slide to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby mode.
Select the right or left position according to the impedance of speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only
when this unit is in the standby mode.
Connecting the Power Supply Cords
After completing all connections, connect the AC power
cord to an AC power outlet. Disconnect the AC power cord
if you will not use this unit for a long period of time.
AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)
Europe model .................................................... 2 OUTLETS
U.K. model.......................................................... 1 OUTLET
Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your
components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLET(S)
is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or POWER and
STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any
connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The
maximum power (total power consumption of components)
that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 100 W.
If you use left position right position
CONNECTIONS
(Europe model)
SWITCHED
(Europe model)
To AC outlet
IMPEDANCE
SELECTOR
Rear speakers The impedance of each
speaker must be 6 or
higher.
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 or
higher.
Center
speaker
The impedance must be 6
or higher.
The impedance must be 8
or higher.
If you use one pair of main
speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 4 or
higher.
If you use one pair of main
speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 8 or
higher.
If you use two pairs of main
speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 8 or
higher.
If you use two pairs of main
speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 16 or
higher.
Main
speakers
0103V596RDS09-20_EN 2/29/0, 3:29 PM18
19
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
Using the Test Tone
The adjustment of each speaker sound output level should
be performed at your listening position with the remote
control. After completing the adjustments, use VOLUME
(+/–) at your listening position to check if the adjustments
are satisfactory.
1 Set the selector dial to the
AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN)
position.
2 Press TEST.
“TEST LEFT” appears on the display.
3 Turn up the volume.
You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from each
speaker for about two seconds in the following order:
left main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker,
right rear speaker and left rear speaker. The display
changes as shown below.
Notes
If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set the unit
in the standby mode and check the speaker connections.
If the test tone cannot be heard from the center speaker, check the
setting of “CENTER SP” on the SET MENU.
This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level
balance between the main, center and rear speakers by using
the built-in test tone generator. When this adjustment is
performed, the sound output level heard at the listening
position will be the same from each speaker. This is
important for the best performance of the digital sound field
processor, the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital
decoder and DTS decoder.
Before You Start Adjusting
1 Set VOLUME to the m
position.
2 Turn the power on.
3 Press SPEAKERS A or B
to select the main
speakers to be used.
If you use two main speaker
systems, press both A and B.
4 Set BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE to the “0”
position.
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE
LR
–+–+
12
4
3
LR
–+–+
1
2,7
5
3
6
TEST
LEFT
TEST
RIGHT
TEST L SUR. TEST R SUR.
TEST CENTER
0103V596RDS09-20_EN 2/29/0, 3:29 PM19
20
4 Adjust BALANCE on the
front panel so that the
sound output level of the
right main speaker and the
left main speaker is the
same.
5 Press TIME/LEVEL
repeatedly to select the
speaker to be adjusted.
“CENTER”, “R SUR.” or
“L SUR.” appears on the
display.
y
After pressing TIME/LEVEL once, you can also select the item by
pressing d. (Pressing u changes the selection in the reverse order.)
6 Press i to raise and j to
lower the level. Adjust the
sound output levels of the
center speaker and the
rear speakers so that they
become almost the same
as that of the main
speakers.
While adjusting, the test tone is
heard from the selected speaker.
Note
You cannot adjust the delay time while the test tone is being heard
even if “DELAY” appears on the display.
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE
Front panel
LR
7 When the adjustment is complete, press TEST.
“TEST OFF” appears on the display and the test tone
stops.
Note
If “CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to the NONE position,
the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted in
step 6. The center channel sound is automatically output from the
right and left main speakers.
y
Once you have completed the adjustments, you can only adjust
the overall volume level of your audio system by using VOLUME
(or VOLUME (+/–)).
If you use external amplifiers, you may also use their volume
controls to achieve the proper balance.
If there is insufficient sound output from the center and rear
speakers, you may decrease the main speaker output level by
setting “MAIN LVL” on the SET MENU to “–10 dB”. (Refer to
page 40 for details.)
0103V596RDS09-20_EN 2/29/0, 3:29 PM20
21
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
When using the remote control, set the selector dial to
the AMP/TUN position.
1 Set VOLUME to the m
position.
2 Turn the power on.
3 Press SPEAKERS A or B
to select the main
speakers to be used.
If you use two main speaker
systems, press both A and B.
PLAYING A SOURCE
LR
–+–+
1,6
4
2
67
3
7
4
6
2
4 Select the desired input
source with INPUT
SELECTOR (or the input
selector buttons). (Turn on
the TV monitor for video
sources.)
The name of the selected input
source appears for a moment
and the arrow for the selected
input source indicator lights up
on the display.
a. To select a tape or an MD source
Press TAPE/MD MON / EXT.
DECODER (or TAPE/MD) so
that the “TAPE/MD
MONITOR” indicator lights up
on the display.
b. To select a source connected to the
EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals
Press TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER repeatedly
(or EXT. DEC.) until “EXT. DECODER” appears on
the display.
Notes
If the “TAPE/MD MONITOR” indicator lights up or “EXT.
DECODER” is shown on the display, no other audio source
except a tape/MD source and a source connected to the
EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals can be played. To
select another input source with INPUT SELECTOR (or the input
selector buttons):
Press TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER twice (or TAPE/MD
once) to turn off the “TAPE/MD MONITOR” indicator.
Press TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER once (or EXT.
DEC.) to turn off “EXT. DECODER”.
If you select and play a video source when the “TAPE/MD
MONITOR” indicator lights up, the play back result will be a
video image from the video source and the sound from the audio
source connected to the TAPE/MD IN (PLAY) terminals.
A video source cannot be selected when “EXT. DECODER” is
shown on the display. If you want to enjoy an audio source
connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals
together with a video source, first select the video source and then
select the source connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER
INPUT terminals.
y
For the DVD/LD, TV/digital TV and cable TV/satellite tuner
sources, the current input mode is also shown. Refer to page 23 for
details about the input mode.
Front panel
Front panel
Front panel
or
Remote control
Front panel
Input source
BASIC OPERATION
Front panel Remote control
or
0104V596RDS21-26_EN 2/29/0, 3:29 PM21
22
5 Play the source.
Refer to the instructions for the source component (and
page 27 for details about tuning).
Note
When controlling an audio/video component (tape deck, MD
recorder, CD player, DVD/LD player, etc.) with the remote
control, set the selector dial to the appropriate position (TAPE/
MD, CD, DVD/LD, etc.), corresponding to the component you
want to control. Refer to “PRESET REMOTE CONTROL” on
page 45.
6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.
If desired, adjust BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, etc.
These controls are only effective for sound from the
main speakers.
BASS controls the low-frequency response.
TREBLE controls the high-frequency response.
BALANCE adjusts the balance of the output volume
from the right and left main speakers.
7 Use the digital sound field processor.
Refer to page 25.
PLAYING A SOURCE
To mute the sound
Press MUTE on the remote
control.
To cancel mute, press MUTE.
Note
During muting, “MUTE ON” appears on the display.
When you have finished using this
unit
Press STANDBY/ON (or STANDBY) to set this unit in the
standby mode.
BGV (background video) function
The BGV function allows you to combine a video image
from a video source with a sound from an audio source.
(For example, you can listen to classical music while you
are watching a video.) This function can only be controlled
with the remote control.
Play a video source, and then select an audio source with
the input selector buttons on the remote control. The BGV
function does not work if you select the audio source with
INPUT SELECTOR on the front panel.
Remote controlFront panel
or
LR
–+–+
Front panel
Front panel Remote control
or
0104V596RDS21-26_EN 2/29/0, 3:29 PM22
23
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
Input Mode (for the DVD/LD, TV/
digital TV and cable TV/satellite
tuner sources)
This unit allows you to switch the input mode for sources
that send both digital and analog signals to this unit. The
AUTO, DTS and ANALOG input modes are provided.
When you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode for
the DVD/LD source is always set to AUTO and for TV/
digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner source is set according
to “TV INPUT” and “CBL INPUT” on the SET MENU.
(Refer to page 41 for details.)
AUTO
In this mode, the input signal is selected in the following
order of priority:
1. Digital signal encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS
2. Normal digital signal (PCM)
3. Analog signal (ANALOG)
Note
If digital signals are input from both the OPTICAL and
COAXIAL terminals, the digital signal from the COAXIAL
terminal is selected.
DTS
In this mode, only a digital signal encoded with DTS is
selected, even if other signals are being input at the same
time.
ANALOG
In this mode, only an analog signal is selected, even if a
digital signal is being input at the same time. Select this
mode when you want to use an analog signal instead of a
digital signal.
PLAYING A SOURCE
Switching the input mode
Press INPUT MODE (or the input selector
button that you have pressed to select the
input source on the remote control) repeatedly
until the desired input mode is shown on the
display.
Notes
Set the input mode to AUTO to play a DVD/LD source encoded
with Dolby Digital.
The sound output may be interrupted for some LD and DVD
players in the following situation: The input mode is set to
AUTO. A search is performed while playing the disc encoded
with Dolby Digital or DTS, and then disc playing is restored. The
sound output is interrupted for a moment because the digital
signal was selected again.
The input mode cannot be changed for the CD, TUNER, TAPE/
MD, VCR, PHONO and VIDEO AUX sources because only
analog signals are used for these.
The current input mode appears on the display when the DVD/
LD, TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner source is selected,
or the input mode is changed.
Front panel Remote control
or
0104V596RDS21-26_EN 2/29/0, 3:29 PM23
24
Notes on playing a source
encoded with DTS
If “DATA ERROR” appears on the display while playing an LD
source encoded with DTS, stop playback and turn the player off
and then on again.
If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any
way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you
make a digital connection between this unit and the player.
If you play an LD source encoded with DTS and set the input
mode to ANALOG, there will be the noise of an unprocessed
DTS signal. When you want to play a DTS source, be sure to
connect the source to the digital input terminal and set the input
mode to AUTO or DTS.
If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source
encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound.
If you play a source encoded with DTS and set the input mode to
AUTO, there will be a short noise at first while the unit
recognizes the DTS signal and turns on the DTS decoder. This is
not a malfunction, and can be avoided by setting the input mode
to DTS beforehand. In addition, if you continue to play a source
encoded with DTS with the input mode setting left to AUTO, this
unit automatically switches to the “DTS-decoding” mode to
prevent noise from being generated during subsequent operation.
(The “t” indicator lights up on the display.) The “t
indicator will flash immediately after playback of a source
encoded with DTS has finished. Only a source encoded with DTS
can be played back while this indicator is flashing. If you want to
play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to
AUTO.
PLAYING A SOURCE
Notes on playing an LD source
Some audio/video components, such as an LD player, output
different audio signals through their analog and digital terminals.
Change the input mode as necessary.
If the input mode is set to AUTO for the LD source, this unit
automatically determines which type of signal the LD source
contains. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the
decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting and
reproduces 5.1 channel sound.
If the LD player is transmitting signals by a non-normal method,
this unit cannot detect the Dolby Digital or DTS signal. In this
case, the decoder automatically switches to PCM or analog.
If the LD source does not contain a digital soundtrack, connect
the LD player to the analog terminals and set the input mode to
AUTO or ANALOG.
While you are operating the LD player and playing a disc encoded
with Dolby Digital, if you switch from the pause or chapter
forwarding function to normal playback, you may hear the PCM
or analog sound an instant before the Dolby Digital sound is
played.
Notes on the digital signal
The digital input terminal of this unit can also handle
96-kHz sampling 24-bit digital signals. (To utilize this, use a
source that supports 96-kHz sampling 24-bit digital signals
and set the player for digital output. Refer to the instructions
for the player.) Note the following when a 96-kHz sampling
24-bit digital signal is input to this unit.
1. The following indicator will appear on the display.
2. DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output
as normal 2-channel stereo sound using only the right
and left main speakers.
3. Delay time and speaker output level cannot be adjusted.
0104V596RDS21-26_EN 9/29/0, 10:07 AM24
25
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
On the remote control
1 Make sure that the effect speakers (center and
rear) and subwoofer are turned on.
2 Press DSP.
The indicator lights up for about
three seconds.
3 Use the numeric buttons
(1 to 8) to select the
desired program before the
indicator goes off.
The name of the selected
program appears on the display.
If the selector dial is set to the DSP/TUN position, you
can select a DSP program directly with the numeric
buttons.
y
If desired, adjust the delay time and the sound output level of each
speaker. (Refer to pages 42 and 43 for details.)
Notes
You can select a DSP program for each of the input sources. Once
you select a program, it is linked with the input source selected at
that time. So, when you select the input source next time, the
same program is automatically selected.
When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/
Normal or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED, no sound will be heard
from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be
heard from the center speaker. However, if “CENTER SP” on the
SET MENU is set to the NONE position, the center channel
sound is output from the main speakers.
When a source connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT
terminals of this unit is selected, the digital sound field processor
cannot be used.
When high-rate 96-kHz sampling 24-bit digital signals are input
to this unit, no DSP program can be selected and the sound is only
output from right and left main speakers as a normal 2-channel
stereo sound.
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP) EFFECT
Selecting a DSP Program
You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a
DSP program. Refer to pages 35 to 37 for details about each
program.
On the front panel
1 Make sure that the effect speakers (center and
rear) and subwoofer are turned on.
2 Press PROGRAM h or l
repeatedly to select the
desired program.
The name of the selected
program appears on the display.
LR
–+–+
2
2
3
DSP program name
DSP program name
0104V596RDS21-26_EN 2/29/0, 3:29 PM25
26
Canceling the Sound Effect (turning
off the effect speakers)
Press EFFECT to cancel
the sound effect and
monitor only the main
sound.
Press EFFECT again to turn the
sound effect back on.
y
If the selector dial is set to a position other than the DSP/TUN
position, first press DSP and then EFFECT on the remote control.
Notes
If you turn off the sound effect when Dolby Digital or DTS is
decoding, the sounds of the center and rear channels are mixed
and output from the main speakers.
If you turn off the sound effect when Dolby Digital or DTS is
decoding, it may happen that the sound is output faintly or not
output normally, depending on the source. In this case, turn sound
effect back on.
Front panel
or
Remote control
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP) EFFECT
0104V596RDS21-26_EN 2/29/0, 3:29 PM26
27
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
5 Press PRESET/TUNING h once to tune in to a
higher frequency or l once to tune in to a
lower frequency.
Press the button again if the tuning search does not stop
at the desired station.
y
Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop
at the desired station (because the signal from the station is weak).
When tuned in to a station, the frequency of the received station is
shown on the display. If an RDS station that offers the PS data
service is being received, the station name is shown instead of the
frequency on the display.
Manual Tuning
1 Use INPUT SELECTOR to
select the tuner as the
input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM
or AM).
“FM” or “AM” appears on the display.
3 Press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO”
indicator goes off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn z off.
5 Press PRESET/TUNING h or l to tune in to
the desired station.
To continue the tuning search, hold down the button.
Note
If you tune in manually to an FM station, it will be automatically
received in monaural mode to increase the signal quality.
TUNING
LR
–+–+
32
1
4
5
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference. However, if the signal
from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune
in to it manually (manual tuning).
Automatic Tuning
1 Use INPUT SELECTOR to
select the tuner as the
input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM
or AM).
“FM” or “AM” appears on the display.
3 Press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO”
indicator lights up on the display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn z off.
Lights up
Goes off
Turn “ z off
Turn “ z off
or
or
0105V596RDS27-30_EN 2/29/0, 3:29 PM27
28
Automatic Preset Tuning (for RDS
stations only)
You can make use of the automatic preset tuning function
for RDS stations only. This function enables the unit to
automatically tune in with strong signals and to sequentially
store up to 40 RDS stations (5 groups x 8 stations). (Refer to
pages 31 to 33 for details on RDS stations.)
1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.
2 Press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO”
indicator lights up on the display.
3 Hold down MEMORY for about three seconds.
The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO”
indicators flash. After about five seconds, automatic
preset tuning begins from the frequency currently
displayed toward the higher frequencies.
Received stations are sequentially stored as A1, A2 ...
A8. If more than 8 stations have been tuned, they are
stored as preset station numbers in other groups (B, C,
D and E) in that order.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode.
If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week,
the memory will be erased. If so, store the stations again
by using preset tuning methods.
LR
–+–+
21 3
Automatic preset tuning options
You can select the preset number from which the unit will
store RDS stations and/or begin tuning toward lower
frequencies. Before automatic preset tuning begins (after
pressing MEMORY in step 3):
1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING h or l to
select the preset number with which the first station will
be stored. The automatic preset tuning will stop when
stations have all been stored up to E8.
2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn “ z ” off and
then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward
lower frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is
completed
The display shows the frequency of the last preset station.
Check the contents and the number of preset stations by
following the procedure in the section “To Recall a Preset
Station” on page 29.
Notes
A new setting can be stored in place of the former one.
You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM
station by simply using the manual preset tuning method.
Automatic preset tuning will be performed for all RDS network
stations until all have been stored up to E8. Even if the number of
received stations is not enough to be stored up to E8, automatic
preset tuning is automatically ended after searching for all
stations.
Only RDS stations with sufficient signal strength are stored by
automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in
signal strength, tune in to it manually in monaural mode and store
it by using the manual preset tuning method. (There may be a
case that this unit cannot receive a station which could be
received by using the automatic tuning method. This is because
this unit receives a large amount of PI (Program Identification)
data along with the station.)
TUNING
Lights up
Flashes
0105V596RDS27-30_EN 2/29/0, 3:29 PM28
29
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
TUNING
To Recall a Preset Station
You can recall any desired station simply by selecting the
preset station number with which it was stored.
You can also recall a preset station with the remote control.
Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN position and press
TUNER (number 2) to select the tuner as the input source.
1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the required group
of preset stations.
Make sure that “ z ” appears on the display.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING h or l (or PRESET
+/–) to select a preset station number (1 to 8).
The preset group and number appear on the display
along with the reception band, frequency and signal
strength information.
y
You can select the preset station number with the numeric buttons
(1 to 8) on the remote control if code number “0023” has been set
in the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position.
LR
–+–+
1 2
1
2
Flashes
Front panel
or
Remote control
Front panel
or
Remote control
LR
–+–+
3 2,54
Manual Preset Tuning
You can also store up to 40 stations (5 groups x 8 stations)
manually.
1 Tune in to the desired station.
Refer to page 27 for the tuning procedure.
2 Press MEMORY.
The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about five
seconds.
3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select the
desired group (A to E) of preset stations
before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off.
Make sure that “ z ” appears on the display. The
selected group appears on the display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING h or l to select a
preset station number (1 to 8) with which you
want to store the station before the “MEMORY”
indicator goes off.
Press h to select a higher
preset station number and l to
select a lower preset station
number.
5 Press MEMORY before the “MEMORY”
indicator goes off.
The displayed station has been stored as the preset
group and number you have selected, and the reception
band and frequency appear on the display.
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.
Notes
A new setting can be stored in place of the former one.
The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the
station frequency.
0105V596RDS27-30_EN 2/29/0, 3:29 PM29
30
LR
–+–+
2,4
Exchanging Preset Stations
You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations
with each other.
Example: If you want to exchange
preset station “E1” with “A5”
1 Recall preset station “E1”.
Refer to the procedure in the section “To Recall a
Preset Station” on page 29.
2 Hold down (PRESET/TUNING) EDIT for about
three second.
“E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash.
3 Recall preset station “A5” by using the buttons
on the front panel.
“A5” and the “MEMORY”
indicator flash.
4 Press (PRESET/TUNING) EDIT again.
The display shows the exchange of stations has been
completed.
TUNING
Flashes
Flashes
0105V596RDS27-30_EN 2/29/0, 3:29 PM30
31
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
RECEIVING RDS STATIONS
RDS (Radio Data System) is a data transmission system by
FM stations in many countries. Stations using this system
transmit an inaudible stream of data in addition to the
normal radio signal.
RDS data contains various information such as PI (Program
Identification), PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program
Type), RT (Radio Text), CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced
Other Networks), etc. The RDS function is carried out
among the network stations.
Description of RDS Data
This unit can receive PI, PS, PTY, RT, CT, and EON data
when receiving RDS broadcasting stations.
PS (Program Service name) mode:
The name of the RDS station being received is displayed.
PTY (Program Type) mode:
The program type on the RDS station being received is
displayed. There are 15 program types to classify RDS
stations. You can make this unit search for a station which is
broadcasting a program of the desired type. Refer to page 32
for details.
RT (Radio Text) mode:
Information about the program (such as the title of the song,
name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being received
is displayed by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters,
including the umlaut symbol. If other characters are used for
RT data, they are displayed with under-bars.
CT (Clock Time) mode:
The current time is displayed and updated every minute. If
the data are accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may appear.
EON (Enhanced Other Networks):
Refer to page 33.
Changing the RDS Mode
The four modes are available in this unit for displaying RDS
data. When an RDS station is being received, PS, PTY, RT
and/or CT mode indicators that correspond to the RDS data
services offered by the station light up on the display. Press
RDS MODE/FREQ repeatedly to change the display mode
among the RDS data offered by the transmitting station in
the order shown below. Illumination of the red indicator
next to the RDS mode indicator shows that the
corresponding RDS mode is now selected.
Notes
When an RDS station is being received, do not press RDS
MODE/FREQ until one or more RDS mode indicators light up on
the display. If you press the button before the indicators light up
on the display, the mode cannot be changed. This is because the
unit has not yet received all of the RDS data on the station.
RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected.
The RDS data service cannot be utilized by this unit if the
received signal is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode
requires a large amount of data to be received, so it is possible
that the RT mode may not be displayed even if other RDS modes
(PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed.
RDS data cannot sometimes be receive under poor reception
conditions. If so, press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO”
indicator goes off from the display. Although the reception mode
is changed to monaural by this operation, when you change the
display to RDS mode, RDS data may be displayed.
If the signal strength is weakened by external interference during
the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service may be cut
off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear on the display.
PS mode
PTY mode
RT mode
CT mode
Frequency
display mode
0106V596RDS31-34_EN 2/29/0, 3:29 PM31
32
PTY SEEK Function
If you select the desired program type, the unit
automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are
broadcasting a program of the required type.
1 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set the unit in the
PTY SEEK mode.
The program type of the station being received or
“NEWS” flashes on the display.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING h or l to select the
desired program type.
The selected program type appears on the display.
3 Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching all
preset RDS stations.
The selected program type flashes and the “PTY
HOLD” indicator lights up on the display while
searching for stations.
If a station that is broadcasting a program of the
required type is found, the unit stops at that station.
If the called station is not the desired one, press PTY
SEEK START again. The unit begins searching for
another station that is broadcasting a program of the
same type.
RECEIVING RDS STATIONS
To cancel this function
Press PTY SEEK MODE twice.
Program types in the PTY mode
There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations.
NEWS News
AFFAIRS Current affairs
INFO General information
SPORT Sports
EDUCATE Education
DRAMA Drama
CULTURE Culture
SCIENCE Science
VARIED Light entertainment
POP M Pops
ROCK M Rock
M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music (easy-listening)
LIGHT M Light classics
CLASSICS Serious classics
OTHER M Other music
LR
–+–+
312
Flashes
The selected
program type
flashes.
Light up
0106V596RDS31-34_EN 9/29/0, 10:08 AM32
33
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
EON Function
This function uses the EON data service on the RDS station
network. If you simply select the desired program type
(NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), the unit
automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are
scheduled to broadcast a program of the required type and
switches from the station being currently received to the
new station when the broadcasts starts.
Note
This function can only be used when an RDS station that offers
the EON data service is being received. When such a station is
being received, the “EON” indicator lights up on the display.
1 Make sure that the “EON” indicator lights up
on the display.
If the “EON” indicator does not light up, tune in to
another RDS station so that the “EON” indicator lights
up.
LR
–+–+
2
2 Press EON repeatedly to select the desired
program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or
SPORT).
The selected program type name indicator lights up on
the display.
If a preset RDS station of the selected program type
starts broadcasting, the unit will automatically switch
from the program being currently received to that
program. The program type name indicator flashes.
When broadcasting of the required program ends, the
previously received station (or another program on
the same station) is recalled.
To cancel this function
Press EON repeatedly until no program type name lights up
on the display.
RECEIVING RDS STATIONS
Lights up
Lights up
Flashes
0106V596RDS31-34_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM33
34
RECORDING A SOURCE ON TAPE, MD OR VIDEO CASSETTE
LR
–+–+
1,42
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed
from the tape deck, MD recorder or VCR. Refer to the
instructions for these components.
1 Set VOLUME to the “m
position.
2 Select the source you want to record.
3 Begin recording by the tape deck, MD recorder
or VCR connected to this unit.
4 Play the source and then turn up the volume to
confirm the input source.
y
If a tape deck or MD recorder is being used for recording, you can
monitor the sounds being recorded by pressing TAPE/MD MON /
EXT. DECODER (or TAPE/MD).
Notes
The DSP program and the setting of VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE
and BALANCE have no effect on the material being recorded.
Composite video and S video signals pass independently through
this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing
video signals, if your video source component is connected to
provide only an S video (or only a composite video) signal, you
can record only an S video (or only a composite video) signal by
your VCR.
A source connected to this unit only through the digital terminals
cannot be recorded by the tape deck, MD recorder or VCR
connected to this unit.
A source connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT
terminals of this unit cannot be recorded.
Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records,
CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe
copyright laws.
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
2
4
Remote controlFront panel
or
Front panel
Front panel
or
Remote control
0106V596RDS31-34_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM34
35
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
[4] PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED
( ox)
Input source: Dolby Surround
2-ch Dolby Digital
Output channel: 4 channels
DSP: 1 (surround)
[5] DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED
( gx )
Input source: Dolby Digital
Output channel: 5.1 channels
DSP: 2 (surround L, R)
[6] DTS DGTL SUR/ENHANCED
( tx)
Input source: DTS
Output channel: 5.1 channels
DSP: 2 (surround L, R)
This program ideally simulates the multi-
surround speaker systems of the 35 mm-film
movie theater. Dolby Pro Logic decoding,
Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and
digital sound field processing are precisely
performed without altering the original sound
orientation.
The surround effect produced by the sound
field folds around the viewer naturally from
the rear to the right and left, and toward the
screen.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor (DSP). This processor allows you to
electronically expand and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a theater-
like experience in your listening room. You can create outstanding audio sound by selecting a suitable DSP program (this
will, of course, depend on what you are listening to).
When you select a CINEMA DSP program, one of the built-in decoders (Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS) is turned
on according to which type of signals the source being played contains.
The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that
most of these are precise digital re-creations of actual acoustic environments.
The input source given in the following table for programs 4 through 8 indicates that input source which each program
is best suited for.
Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below.
For movie or audio/video sources (Program No. 1 to No. 5: CINEMA DSP
programs)
No. PROGRAM SUBPROGRAM FEATURES
1 q/DTS
SURROUND
[1] PRO LOGIC/Normal ( o )
Input source: Dolby Surround
2-ch Dolby Digital
Output channel: 4 channels
DSP:
[2] DOLBY DIGITAL/Normal ( g )
Input source: Dolby Digital
Output channel: 5.1 channels
DSP:
[3] DTS DGTL SUR/Normal ( t )
Input source: DTS
Output channel: 5.1 channels
DSP:
The built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby
Digital decoder or DTS decoder precisely
reproduces the sound and effect of a source
encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital
or DTS.
The realization of a highly efficient decoding
process improves cross talk and channel
separation, and makes sound positioning
smoother and more precise.
In this program, the digital sound field
processor is not turned on.
ADVANCED OPERATION
0107V596RDS35-37_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM35
36
No. PROGRAM SUBPROGRAM FEATURES
2 MOVIE
THEATER 1
3 MOVIE
THEATER 2
[1] 70 mm SPECTACLE
( ox)
Input source: Dolby Surround
2-ch Dolby Digital
Output channel: 3 channels
DSP: 2 (presence & surround)
[2] DGTL SPECTACLE
( g x )
Input source: Dolby Digital
Output channel: 5.1 channels
DSP: 3 (presence & surround L, R)
[3] DTS SPECTACLE ( tx )
Input source: DTS
Output channel: 5.1 channels
DSP: 3 (presence & surround L, R)
This program creates the extremely wide sound
field of a movie theater. It precisely reproduces
the source sound in detail, giving both the video
and the sound field incredible reality. It is ideal
for any kind of video source encoded with
Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS
(especially large-scale movie productions).
[1] 70 mm ADVENTURE
( ox )
Input source: Dolby Surround
2-ch Dolby Digital
Output channel: 3 channels
DSP: 2 (presence & surround)
[2] DGTL ADVENTURE
( gx)
Input source: Dolby Digital
Output channel: 5.1 channels
DSP: 3 (presence & surround L, R)
[3] DTS ADVENTURE ( t x )
Input source: DTS
Output channel: 5.1 channels
DSP: 3 (presence & surround L, R)
Ideal for precisely reproducing the sound of the
newest multi-track films. The sound field is
made to be similar to that of the newest movie
theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field
itself are restrained as much as possible. The
data for the sound field of an opera house are
used for the front presence, so the three-
dimensional feeling of the sound field is
emphasized, and dialog is precisely oriented on
the screen. By using the data for the sound field
of a concert hall on the surround sound field,
powerful reverberations are generated. You can
enjoy watching action, adventure movies, etc.
with strong presence.
[4] 70 mm GENERAL ( ox )
Input source: Dolby Surround
2-ch Dolby Digital
Output channel: 3 channels
DSP: 2 (presence & surround)
[5] DGTL GENERAL ( gx )
Input source: Dolby Digital
Output channel: 5.1 channels
DSP: 3 (presence & surround L, R)
[6] DTS GENERAL ( t x )
Input source: DTS
Output channel: 5.1 channels
DSP: 3 (presence & surround L, R)
This program is for reproducing sounds on a
multi-track film, and is characterized by a soft
and extensive sound field. The front presence of
the sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially
spreads all around and toward the screen,
restraining echo effect of conversations without
losing clarity. For the surround sound field, the
harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully
in a wide space at the rear of the sound field.
[4] 70 mm SCI-FI ( o x )
Input source: Dolby Surround
2-ch Dolby Digital
Output channel: 3 channels
DSP: 2 (presence & surround)
[5] DGTL SCI-FI ( g x )
Input source: Dolby Digital
Output channel: 5.1 channels
DSP: 3 (presence & surround L, R)
[6] DTS SCI-FI ( t x )
Input source: DTS
Output channel: 5.1 channels
DSP: 3 (presence & surround L, R)
Clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in
the latest sound form of science fiction films,
thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic
space amid the silence. You can enjoy science
fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that
includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and
DTS-encoded software employing the most
advanced techniques.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
0107V596RDS35-37_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM36
37
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
No. PROGRAM FEATURES
4 MONO MOVIE ( x )
Input source: Monaural
Output channel: 1 channel
DSP: 1
This program is designed specifically to enhance monaural
sources. Compared to a strictly mono setting, the sound image
is wider and slightly forward of the speaker pair, lending an
immediacy to the overall sound. It is particularly effective for
old mono movie, news broadcasts and dialog.
5 TV SPORTS ( x )
Input source: Audio/Video
Output channel: 2 to 5.1 channels
DSP: 2 to 3 (presence & surround)
This program is furnished with a tight sound field in which the
sound will not spread excessively at the front, but the rear
surround produces dynamic sound expansion. It is the most
suitable for sports programs.
For Hi-Fi audio sources
No. PROGRAM FEATURES
6 DISCO ( x )
Input source: 2-ch PCM/Analog audio
Output channel: 2 channels
DSP: 1
This program simulates the acoustic environment of a disco in
the heart of a lively city. The sound is dense and highly
concentrated.
7 ROCK CONCERT ( x )
Input source: 2-ch PCM/Analog audio
Output channel: 2 channels
DSP: 1
This program is ideally suited for rock music. You will
experience a dynamic and lively sound field.
8 CONCERT HALL ( x )
Input source: 2-ch PCM/Analog audio
Output channel: 2 channels
DSP: 1
This program creates the expansive ambience of a large concert
hall. It is suited for orchestra and opera music.
CINEMA DSP: Dolby Surround + DSP/Dolby Digital + DSP/DTS + DSP
Dolby Pro Logic + 2 digital sound fields
Digital sound fields are created in both the presence and
rear surround zones of the Dolby Pro Logic-decoded sound
field. They create a wide acoustic environment and
emphasize the surround effect in the room, letting you feel
as much presence as if you were watching a movie in a
popular Dolby Stereo theater.
Dolby Digital or DTS + 3 digital sound fields
Digital sound fields are created in the presence zone and
independently on the left and right surround zones of the
Dolby Digital-decoded or DTS-decoded sound field. They
create a wide acoustic environment and strong surround
effect in the room without losing high channel separation.
With the wide dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS
sound, this sound field combination lets you feel as if you
were watching a movie in the newest Dolby Digital theater
or DTS-installed theater. This is the most ideal home theater
sound at the present time.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
0107V596RDS35-37_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM37
38
SET MENU
1
2
3
This unit provides you with the following items on the SET
MENU to maximize the performance of your system and
expand your enjoyment for audio listening and video
watching.
1. CENTER SP
2. REAR SP
3. MAIN SP
4. BASS OUT
5. MAIN LVL
6. D.D. LFE
7. D-RANGE
8. DTS LFE
9. CNTR DELAY
10.MEM. GUARD
11.TV INPUT
12.CBL INPUT
Adjusting Items on the SET MENU
Adjustments should be performed with the remote control
while watching the information on the display.
1 Set the selector dial to the
AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN)
position.
2 Press SET MENU
repeatedly to select the
item you want to adjust.
The selected item appears on
the display.
y
After pressing SET MENU once, you can also select the item by
pressing d. (Pressing u goes back one selection.)
3 Press i or j repeatedly to
adjust the setting.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the setting of
any other item in the same way.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode.
If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week,
the settings of the SET MENU will automatically return
to the preset positions and values. If so, adjust the
settings of the SET MENU again.
0108V596RDS38-44_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM38
39
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
Description of Each Item
1. CENTER SP
Choices: LRG (Large)/SML (Small)/NONE
Preset position: LRG (Large)
LRG (Large)
Select this position if your center speaker is approximately
the same size as the main speakers. In this position, full-
range signals on the center channel are directed to the center
speaker.
SML (Small)
Select this position if you use a center speaker that is
smaller than the main speakers. In this position, low bass
signals (below 90 Hz) on the center channel are distributed
to the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal (or to the right and
left main speakers if “BASS OUT” is set to the MAIN
position).
NONE
Select this position if you do not have a center speaker
(4-speaker system). In this position, full-range signals on
the center channel are directed to the right and left main
speakers.
2. REAR SP
Choices: LARGE/SMALL
Preset position: LARGE
LARGE
Select this position if your rear speakers have high ability
for bass reproduction, or if a subwoofer is connected in
parallel to the rear speaker. In this position, full-range
signals on the rear channels are directed to the rear speakers.
SMALL
Select this position if your rear speakers do not have high
ability for bass reproduction. In this position, low bass
signals (below 90 Hz) on the rear channels are distributed to
the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal (or to the right and
left main speakers if “BASS OUT” is set to the MAIN
position).
3. MAIN SP
Choices: LARGE/SMALL
Preset position: LARGE
LARGE
Select this position if your main speakers have high ability
for bass reproduction. In this position, full-range signals on
the main channels are directed to the right and left main
speakers.
SMALL
Select this position if your main speakers do not have high
ability for bass reproduction. However, if your system does
not include a subwoofer, do not select this position. In this
position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) on the main
channels are distributed to the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT
terminal if “BASS OUT” is set to the SW position.
4. BASS OUT
Choices: SW/MAIN/BOTH
Preset position: BOTH
SW/BOTH
Select either the SW or BOTH position if your system
includes a subwoofer. In either position, signals on the LFE
channel and low bass signals (below 90 Hz) on the center
and rear channels are directed to the SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT terminal if “CENTER SP” is set to the SML or
NONE position and “REAR SP” is set to the SMALL
position. In the SW position, low bass signals on the main
channels are directed to the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT
terminal if “MAIN SP” is set to the SMALL position. In the
BOTH position, low bass signals on the main channels are
directed to both the main speakers and the SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT terminal.
Note
When playing a 2-channel source (tape, MD, CD, video
cassette etc.), select the BOTH position to direct low bass signals
(below 90 Hz) to the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal.
MAIN
Select this position if your system does not include a
subwoofer. In this position, besides full-range signals on the
main channels, signals on the LFE channel and other low
bass signals (below 90 Hz) that are distributed from other
channels are directed to the right and left main speakers.
SET MENU
0108V596RDS38-44_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM39
40
7. D-RANGE (Adjusting the dynamic
range)
Choices: MAX/STD (Standard)/MIN
Preset position: MAX
Note
This adjustment is only effective when Dolby Digital is being
decoded.
“Dynamic range” is the difference between the maximum
level and the minimum level of sounds. Sounds on a movie
originally designed for movie theaters feature a very wide
dynamic range. Dolby Digital technology can modify the
original sound track into a home audio format with this
wide dynamic range unchanged. Powerful sounds of
extremely wide dynamic range are not always suitable for
home use. Depending on the condition of your listening
environment, it may not be possible to increase the sound
output to a level as high as that in a movie theater. However,
at the normal level suitable for listening in your room, the
low-level parts of source sound often cannot be heard well
because they will be lost among noise in your environment.
Dolby Digital technology has also made it possible to
reduce an original sound track’s dynamic range for a home
audio format by “compressing” the sound data.
MAX
In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital is
reproduced in the original sound track’s wide dynamic
range to provide you with powerful sounds just like those in
a movie theater. Selecting this position will be even better if
you can listen to a source at a high output level in a room
specially soundproofed for audio/video enjoyment.
STD (Standard)
In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital is
reproduced in the “compressed” dynamic range of the
source that is suitable for low-level listening.
MIN
In this position, the dynamic range is more reduced than in
the STD position. Selecting this position will be effective
when you must listen to a source at a low level.
Note
It may happen that sound is output faintly or not output normally
depending on the source. In that case, select the MAX or STD
position.
5. MAIN LVL
Choices: NORM (Normal)/–10 dB
Preset position: NORM (Normal)
NORM (Normal)
Normally select this position.
–10 dB
Select this position if the sound output from the main
speakers is too loud and cannot be balanced with the sound
output from the center and rear speakers. In this position,
the sound output from the main speakers is attenuated.
Notes
The setting of “CENTER SP”, “REAR SP”, “MAIN SP” and
“BASS OUT” have no effect on a source connected to the
EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals on the rear of this
unit.
Once you have adjusted appropriately for “CENTER SP”, “REAR
SP”, “MAIN SP”, “BASS OUT” and “MAIN LVL”, you do not
have to change any settings unless your speaker system is
modified.
6. D.D. LFE (Adjusting the output
level of the LFE channel for Dolby
Digital)
Control range: –20 dB to 0 dB (in 1 dB steps)
Preset value: 0 dB
Note
This adjustment is only effective when Dolby Digital is being
decoded and the selected source encoded with Dolby Digital
contains LFE signals.
This adjusts the output level of the LFE channel. If the LFE
signals are mixed with signals of other channels and they
are directed to the same speakers, the ratio of the LFE signal
level to the level of the other signals can be adjusted.
SET MENU
0108V596RDS38-44_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM40
41
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
8. DTS LFE (Adjusting the output
level of the LFE channel for DTS)
Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB (in 1 dB steps)
Preset value: 0 dB
Note
This adjustment is effective only when DTS is being decoded and
the selected source encoded with DTS contains LFE signals.
This adjusts the output level of the LFE channel. If the LFE
signals are mixed with signals of other channels and they
are directed to the same speakers, the ratio of the LFE signal
level to the level of the other signals can be adjusted.
9. CNTR DELAY (Adjusting the delay
of the sound from the center
speaker)
Control range: 0 ms to 5 ms (in 1 ms steps)
Preset value: 0 ms
This adjusts the delay between the main sound (on the main
channels) and dialog, etc. (on the center channel). The larger
the value, the later the dialog, etc. is generated.
This makes sounds from the left main, center and right main
speakers reach your listening position at the same time. This
is achieved by delaying the sound from the center speaker if
the distance from the center speaker to your listening
position is shorter than the distance from the right and left
main speaker to your listening position.
10.MEM. GUARD (Locking the
settings)
Choices: ON/OFF
Preset position: OFF
If you wish to prevent accidental alterations to the settings
of the SET MENU and other adjustments on this unit, select
the ON position. The following settings on this unit can be
locked:
Settings of other items on the SET MENU
Settings in the TIME/LEVEL mode
Settings when using TEST
11.TV INPUT (Selecting the initial
input mode for a source connected
to the D-TV input terminals)
Choices: AUTO/LAST
Preset position: AUTO
The input mode for a source connected to the D-TV input
terminals of this unit can be automatically set when the
power of this unit is turned on. Refer to page 23 for details
about the input mode.
AUTO
In this position, the input mode is always set to AUTO.
LAST
In this position, the input mode is automatically set to that
selected the last time when the power of this unit was turned
on.
12.CBL INPUT (Selecting the initial
input mode for a source connected
to the CBL/SAT input terminals)
Choices: AUTO/LAST
Preset position: AUTO
The input mode for a source connected to the CBL/SAT
input terminals of this unit can be automatically set when
the power of this unit is turned on. Refer to page 23 for
details about the input mode.
AUTO
In this position, the input mode is always set to AUTO.
LAST
In this position, the input mode is automatically set to that
selected the last time when the power of this unit was turned
on.
SET MENU
0108V596RDS38-44_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM41
42
1. PRO LOGIC/Normal 15 to 30 20
DOLBY DIGITAL/Normal 0 to 15 5
DTS DGTL SUR/Normal 0 to 15 5
PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED 15 to 30 20
DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED 0 to 15 5
DTS DGTL SUR/ENHANCED 0 to 15 5
2. 70 mm SPECTACLE 15 to 30 23
DGTL SPECTACLE 1 to 99 15
DTS SPECTACLE 1 to 99 15
70 mm SCI-FI 15 to 30 20
DGTL SCI-FI 1 to 99 16
DTS SCI-FI 1 to 99 16
3. 70 mm ADVENTURE 15 to 30 20
DGTL ADVENTURE 1 to 99 15
DTS ADVENTURE 1 to 99 15
70 mm GENERAL 15 to 30 20
DGTL GENERAL 1 to 99 15
DTS GENERAL 1 to 99 15
4. MONO MOVIE 1 to 99 49
5. TV SPORTS 1 to 99 9
6. DISCO 1 to 99 40
7. ROCK CONCERT 1 to 99 16
8. CONCERT HALL 1 to 99 44
DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS
When using the digital sound field processor with the Dolby
Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder or DTS decoder,
you can adjust the delay time between the main sound and
sound effect, and each speaker’s output level as you wish.
Note
When high-rate 96-kHz sampling 24-bit digital signals are input
to this unit, the delay time and speaker output levels cannot be
adjusted.
Delay Time
You can adjust the time difference between the beginning of
the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of the
sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the value,
the later the sound effect is generated. The delay time can be
individually adjusted to all DSP programs.
Notes
Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with some
sources.
The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay
time.
Sound Output Level of the Center,
Right Rear and Left Rear Speakers,
and Subwoofer
If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of each
speaker even if it has already been adjusted in
“ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE” on pages 19
and 20.
Notes
The sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted
when the input signal is analog, PCM audio, or encoded with
Dolby Digital in 2-channel.
If “CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to the NONE position,
the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted.
This is because the center channel sound is automatically output
from the right and left main speakers.
Once the sound output level has been adjusted, the level will be
the same for all DSP programs.
Speaker Control range (dB) Preset value
Center MIN, –20 to +10 0
Right rear MIN, –20 to +10 0
Left rear MIN, –20 to +10 0
Subwoofer MIN, –20 to 0 0
Program
Control
range (ms)
Preset
value
0108V596RDS38-44_EN 3/8/0, 12:32 PM42
43
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
Adjusting Method
Adjustments should be performed with the remote control
while watching the information on the display.
1 Set the selector dial to the
AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN)
position.
2 Press TIME/LEVEL repeatedly to select the
item you want to adjust.
Each time you press TIME/LEVEL, the selected item
changes and appears on the display as shown below.
y
You can also select the item by pressing d. (Pressing u changes
the selection in the reverse order.)
Note
Depending on the setting of the SET MENU, you may not be able
to select all these items.
DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS
1
2
3
3 Press i or j to adjust the
delay time or speaker
output levels.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the settings of
any other item.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode.
If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week,
the latest values for the delay time and the center/rear/
subwoofer output levels that were set will automatically
return to the preset values. If so, adjust the delay time
and output levels again.
Delay time
Center speaker output level
Right rear speaker output level
Left rear speaker output level
Subwoofer output level
DELAY
CENTER
R SUR.
L SUR.
SWFR
0108V596RDS38-44_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM43
44
SLEEP TIMER
Canceling the Selected SLEEP
Timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”
appears on the display.
It will soon disappear and the “SLEEP” indicator will
go off.
Note
The SLEEP timer can also be canceled by setting the unit in the
standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control (or
STANDBY/ON on the front panel), or by disconnecting the AC
power cord from the AC power outlet.
The SLEEP timer can be used to automatically set this unit
in the standby mode. This timer is useful when you are
going to sleep while enjoying the desired input source. The
SLEEP timer can only be set with the remote control.
Note
The SLEEP timer is effective for the components connected to the
AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit.
Setting the SLEEP Timer
1 Play a source you want to enjoy when you are
going to sleep.
2 Set the selector dial to a
position other than the TV
position.
3 Press SLEEP repeatedly to
select the desired SLEEP
time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the SLEEP time will
change as below:
4 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the
display after the SLEEP timer has been set.
The display returns to the previous indication.
Lights up
Flashes
120 90 60 30
The SLEEP timer is off
(SLEEP OFF).
(This is the state before
SLEEP is pressed.)
2
3
0108V596RDS38-44_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM44
45
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
The provided remote control is factory set to control not only this unit but also most YAMAHA audio components connected
to it.
Selector Dial
There are nine positions that you can select to control connected components with this remote control. For example, if the CD
position is selected, the remote control is set in the CD operation mode, allowing the CD player to be operated by the buttons
on the remote control. When turning the selector dial, the position changes as follows:
Note
The button functions on the remote control differ depending on the position of the selector dial. Refer to the following pages for details.
Commonly used buttons in any position of the selector dial
Regardless of the position of the selector dial, you can control this unit and your TV with the following buttons.
Note
You have to set the code for your TV before you can control the TV.
Controlling this unit
Refer to pages 7 and 8.
1 STANDBY
2 POWER
3 VOLUME (+/–)
4 SLEEP
Note
If you have set the code for your TV and set the selector dial to
the TV position, this button is used to set the SLEEP timer for the
TV.
5 MUTE
Note
If you have set the code for your TV and set the selector dial to
the TV position, this button is used to mute the TV sound.
Controlling your TV
! TV POWER
@ TV INPUT
# TV VOLUME
AMP/TUN
You can perform the basic operations of
this unit. Refer to pages 7 and 8.
CD
The code for a YAMAHA CD
player is factory set.
CBL/SAT
A cable TV or satellite tuner can be
controlled.
VCR
A VCR can be controlled.
TV
A TV can be controlled.
TAPE/MD
The code for a YAMAHA tape deck is factory set.
(Be sure to set the proper code when operating an
MD recorder.)
DVD/LD & DVD MENU
An LD player can be controlled in the DVD/
LD position. A DVD player can be controlled
in the DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions.
The code for a YAMAHA DVD player is
factory set. If the remote control does not
operate your YAMAHA DVD player, you
need to set the code number “0048”.
DSP/TUN
This unit can be controlled and DSP programs can be
selected directly.
Selector
dial
2
1
3
5
4
@
#
!
0109V596RDS45-52_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM45
46
2
5
4
3
7
6
Controlling the Components
Connected to This Unit
Example: To control a YAMAHA CD
player
1 Make sure that VOLUME is set to the m
position.
2 Set the selector dial to the
CD position.
3 Turn on the power.
4 Press INPUT.
The indicator lights up for
about three second.
5 Press CD (number 1) while
the indicator is lit.
6 Press p.
Refer to page 48 for the CD
player operation buttons.
7 Adjust the volume.
If you set the remote control with the manufacturers’
codes listed from page i at the end of this
manual, you can control other brands of components.
Refer to “Setup codes” on page 51 for details.
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
0109V596RDS45-52_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM46
47
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
Description of Each Position
TAPE/MD position
The dark-shaded buttons do not function.
If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, use the original remote control
supplied with your component.
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
Select the TAPE/MD position.
r REC/PAUSE
This button gives a pause in recording on a
tape deck or MD recorder.
p PLAY
This button plays a tape or an MD.
b DIR A (TAPE)
This button selects the playing direction of
deck A.
SKIP– (MD)
This button skips to the beginning of the
previous track.
w REWIND (TAPE)
This button rewinds a tape.
SEARCH (MD)
This button initiates a backward search on the
track that is playing to find the point from
which you want to listen.
Numeric buttons (MD)
+10 (MD)
While the indicator lights up for about three
seconds after pressing DSP, this button turns
on or off the effect speakers (center and rear).
DECK A/B (TAPE)
This button selects deck A or B on a double-
cassette tape deck.
DISPLAY (MD)
e PAUSE (MD)
This button gives a pause in operation.
a DIR B (TAPE)
This button selects the playing direction of
deck B.
SKIP+ (MD)
This button skips to the beginning of the next
track.
s STOP
This button stops operation on a tape deck or
MD recorder.
f FAST FORWARD (TAPE)
This button winds a tape fast forward.
SEARCH (MD)
This button initiates a fast-forward search on
the track that is playing to find the point from
which you want to listen.
AV POWER
(TAPE) This button turns on the tape deck
that has a remote control with a power button
if you have set the code for another
manufacturer.
(MD) This button turns on the MD recorder
that has a remote control with a power button
if you have set the code for another
manufacturer.
0109V596RDS45-52_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM47
48
CD position
The dark-shaded buttons do not function.
If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, use the original remote control
supplied with your component.
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
y
PAUSE/STOP function
Press the button once to give a pause in operation and press once more to stop operation.
Select the CD position.
DISC SKIP+/–
(for a CD player with CD changer)
These buttons skip to the next or previous CD.
p PLAY
This button plays a CD.
b SKIP–
This button skips to the beginning of the previous
track.
w SEARCH
This button initiates a backward search on the
track that is playing to find the point from
which you want to listen.
Numeric buttons
DISPLAY
INDEX
+10
While the indicator lights up for about three
seconds after pressing DSP, this button turns
on or off the effect speakers (center and rear).
e PAUSE
This button gives a pause in operation. The
button functions as PAUSE/STOP* for
operating a YAMAHA CD player under
factory setting.
a SKIP+
This button skips to the beginning of the next
track.
s STOP
This button stops operation. The button
functions as PAUSE/STOP* for operating
YAMAHA CD player under factory setting.
f SEARCH
This button initiates a fast-forward search on
the track that is playing to find the point from
which you want to listen.
AV POWER
This button turns on the CD player that has a
remote control with a power button if you
have set the code for another manufacturer.
0109V596RDS45-52_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM48
49
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
DVD/LD position
DVD MENU position
Note
DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players.
The dark-shaded buttons do not function.
If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, use the original remote control
supplied with your component.
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
DISC SKIP+/–
RETURN
TITLE/INDEX
+10
DISPLAY
MENU UP
MENU RIGHT
MENU DOWN
MENU
MENU SELECT
MENU LEFT
TITLE
Select the DVD MENU position.
AV POWER
This button turns on the YAMAHA DVD player if you have
set the code number “0048”. Also this button turns on the
DVD player that has a remote control with a power button if
you have set the code for another manufacturer.
Numeric buttons
DISC SKIP+/–
TITLE/INDEX
+10
DISPLAY
PAUSE
SKIP+
STOP
SEARCH
PLAY
SKIP–
SEARCH
Select the DVD/LD position.
AV POWER
(DVD) This button turns on the YAMAHA DVD player if
you have set the code number “0048”. Also this button turns
on the DVD player that has a remote control with a power
button if you have set the code for another manufacturer.
(LD) This button turns on the LD player that has a remote
control with a power button if you have set the
code for another manufacturer.
Numeric buttons
0109V596RDS45-52_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM49
50
VCR position CBL/SAT position
TV position
Note
You can control your VCR if you have set the code for it.
The dark-shaded buttons do not function.
If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, use the original remote control
supplied with your component.
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
VCR REC
Press this button
twice to start
recording.
AV POWER
This button turns on a VCR
that has a remote control
with a power button if you
have set the code for your
VCR.
Select the CBL/SAT
position.
CHANNEL +/–
ENTER
+10
DISPLAY/
GUIDE (SAT)
MENU UP
MENU RIGHT
MENU DOWN
MENU
MENU SELECT
MENU LEFT
RECALL
Select the TV position.
Numeric buttons
AV POWER
This button turns on a
cable TV/satellite tuner
that has a remote
control with a power
button if you have set
the code for your cable
TV/satellite tuner.
TV POWER
This button turns on a TV that
has a remote control with a
power button if you have set
the code for your TV.
Numeric buttons
Numeric buttons
Select the
VCR position.
CHANNEL +/–
ENTER/RECALL
+10
DISPLAY
PAUSE
STOP
FAST
FORWARD
PLAY
REWIND
VCR REC
Press this button twice.
TV INPUT
TV VOL
CHANNEL +/–
ENTER/RECALL
+10
DISPLAY
VCR PAUSE
VCR STOP
VCR FAST
FORWARD
VCR POWER
TV SLEEP
TV MUTE
VCR PLAY
VCR REWIND
0109V596RDS45-52_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM50
51
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
Advanced Information
Setup codes
You can set the code for the manufacturer of your
component in each position of the selector dial.
1 Turn on your component to be used.
2 Set the selector dial to the
desired position for the
component (TAPE/MD, CD,
DVD/LD, etc.).
3 Press i (right) and j (left)
at the same time for about
four seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
4 Use the numeric buttons to
enter the four-digit
manufacturer’s code for
the component to be used.
Make sure that the
indicator flashes twice.
If the indicator does not flash or
flashes rapidly several times,
repeat step 3 and re-enter the
code.
5 Press AV POWER (or any other button) on the
remote control to check if you have set the
code correctly.
If your component cannot be
controlled with the remote
control, try setting another code
for the same manufacturer.
Notes
You can set only one code for one position.
In the DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions:
Be sure to set the selector dial to the DVD/LD position before
entering the code for the DVD/LD player. The code set in the
DVD/LD position is also simultaneously set in the DVD MENU
position. You cannot set the code for a DVD player when the
selector dial is set to the DVD MENU position.
If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for
the manufacturer, use the original remote control supplied with
your component.
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
To use a second (and third) VCR
You can control a second (and third) VCR in the CBL/SAT
and DVD MENU positions if a cable TV or satellite tuner,
or DVD player is not being used.
Note
If you want to control a second (and third) VCR in the DVD
MENU position, you must set the code for an LD player in the
DVD/LD position.
1 Turn on the VCR to be used.
2 Set the selector dial to the
CBL/SAT or DVD MENU
position.
3 Press i (right) and j (left)
at the same time for about
four seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
4 Use the numeric buttons to
enter the four-digit code
for the second (and third)
VCR. Make sure that the
indicator flashes twice.
If the indicator does not flash or
flashes rapidly several times,
repeat step 3 and re-enter the
code.
5 Press AV POWER (or any other button) on the
remote control to check if you have set the
code correctly.
If the VCR cannot be controlled
with the remote control, try
setting another code for the
same manufacturer.
0109V596RDS45-52_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM51
52
Returning to the factory-set codes
To return to the factory-set codes in all positions, follow
these steps.
1 Press i (right) and j (left)
at the same time for about
four seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
2 Enter the code number
“9990”.
Make sure that the indicator
flashes twice.
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
To return to the factory-set codes in each position, follow
these steps.
1 Set the selector dial to the
position for the
component to be returned
to the factory-set code.
2 Press i (right) and j (left)
at the same time for about
four seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
3 Enter the code number
“0000”.
Make sure that the indicator
flashes twice.
The following codes are factory set.
Selector dial
position
Component
Code
TV TV 0101
CBL/SAT Satellite tuner 0006
VCR VCR 0002
DVD/LD DVD player 0008 (YAMAHA DVD player)
CD CD player 0005 (YAMAHA CD player)
TAPE/MD Tape deck 0004 (YAMAHA Tape deck)
AMP/TUN this unit 0003
DSP/TUN this unit 0013
We recommend that you write all the code numbers you
have set on the “Quick Reference Card”.
0109V596RDS45-52_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM52
53
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
TROUBLESHOOTING
If the unit fails to operate normally, check the following points to determine whether the fault can be corrected by the simple
measures suggested. If it cannot be corrected, or if the fault is not listed in the SYMPTOM column, disconnect the power
cord and contact your authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
General
SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY
The unit does not work
normally.
No sound and/or no
picture.
The power cord is not connected or the plug is
not completely inserted.
Firmly connect the power cord.
The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the
rear panel is not fully set to the right or left
position.
Set the switch fully to the right or left position
when the unit is in the standby mode.
The internal microcomputer has been frozen by
an external electric shock (lightning, excessive
static electricity, etc.) or by a power supply with
low voltage.
Set the unit in the standby mode and disconnect
the AC power cord from the AC power outlet.
After about 30 seconds have passed, connect
the power and operate the unit again.
The speaker connections are not secure.
Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
An appropriate input source has not been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with INPUT
SELECTOR or TAPE/MD MON / EXT.
DECODER (or the input selector buttons).
Secure the connections.
SPEAKERS have not been set properly. Set SPEAKERS corresponding to the speakers
in use to the ON position.
No picture.
There is no S VIDEO connection between this
unit and the TV monitor, although S video
signals are being input to this unit.
Connect the monitor’s “S” video input terminal
to this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT
terminal.
Only the speaker on one
side can be heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
Incorrect setting of BALANCE. Adjust it to the appropriate position.
No sound from the effect
speakers.
The sound effect is off. Press EFFECT to turn it on.
A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS
decoding DSP program is being used with
material not encoded with Dolby Surround,
Dolby Digital or DTS.
Select another DSP program.
The sound is muted.
Set VOLUME to the “m” position, press
MUTE to cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
Play a source whose signals this unit can
reproduce.
Digital signals other than PCM audio and the
signals encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS
which this unit cannot reproduce are being input
to this unit by a CD-ROM, etc.
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuit has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Set the unit in the standby mode and then turn
on to reset the protection circuit.
The SLEEP timer has functioned.
Turn on the power, and play the source again.
Refer to
page
APPENDIX
18
13, 14
21
16
21
22
14
44
16
22
26
37
The unit fails to turn on
when STANDBY/ON (or
POWER) is pressed, or
enters in the standby
mode soon after the
power has been turned
on.
18
The 96-kHz sampling 24-bit digital signals are
input to this unit.
24
0110V596RDS53-59_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM53
54
SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY
The sound effect cannot
be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect by a
tape deck or MD recorder connected to the
TAPE/MD OUT (REC) terminals of this unit.
Refer to
page
TROUBLESHOOTING
35, 36, 37
42
37
39
39
13, 14
No sound from the
center speaker.
The sound output level of the center speaker is
set to minimum.
Raise the level of the center speaker.
“CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to the
NONE position.
Select the LRG or SML position.
Incorrect DSP program is selected. Select the appropriate program.
The source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS
does not have a center channel signal.
No sound from the rear
speakers.
The output level of the rear speakers is set to
minimum.
Raise the output level of the rear speakers.
A monaural source is being played with the PRO
LOGIC/Normal or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED
program.
Select another DSP program suitable for the
monaural source.
Select the BOTH position.
The source does not contain low bass signals
(below 90 Hz).
No sound from the
subwoofer.
“BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to the
SW or MAIN position when playing a 2-channel
source.
42
Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
No connection from the turntable to the GND
terminal.
Make the GND connection between the
turntable and this unit.
A “humming” sound can
be heard.
The volume level is low
while playing a record.
The record is being played on a turntable with an
MC cartridge.
The turntable should be connected to the unit
through the MC head amplifier.
The volume level cannot
be increased, or the
sound is distorted.
The component connected to the TAPE/MD
OUT (REC) terminals of this unit is in the
standby mode.
Turn on the power to the component.
13
13
The DVD/LD, TV/digital TV
or cable TV/satellite tuner
source cannot be
recorded by a tape deck,
MD recorder or VCR
connected to this unit.
The DVD/LD player, TV/digital TV or cable
TV/satellite tuner is connected to the unit only
through the digital terminals.
Make additional connections between the
analog terminals.
34
14
Adjusting this unit by
using SET MENU, TIME/
LEVEL or TEST cannot
be performed.
“MEM. GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to
the ON position.
Set “MEM. GUARD” to the OFF position.
41
0110V596RDS53-59_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM54
55
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
Remote control
This unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power of the unit.
SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY
Refer to
page
The remote control does
not work.
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter
type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the
remote control sensor of this unit.
Reposition the unit.
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones.
The unit or other
component cannot be
controlled.
The component to be controlled has not been
selected.
Set the selector dial to the appropriate position,
corresponding to the component to be controlled.
The manufacturer’s code has not been set
properly.
Enter the code again.
Try setting another code for the same
manufacturer.
Others
SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY
Refer to
page
The sound is degraded
when listening with
headphones to a tape
deck or CD player
connected to this unit.
There is noise
interference from digital
or high-frequency
equipment, or the unit.
The unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Move the unit further away from such
equipment.
TROUBLESHOOTING
3
2
51
Previously preset
stations can no
longer be tuned in.
The unit has been disconnected for a long
period.
Re-store the stations.
FM
AM
Tuner
SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY
FM stereo reception
is noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts
may cause this problem when the transmitter is
too far away or the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
There is distortion,
and clear reception
cannot be obtained
even with a good FM
antenna.
There is multipath interference.
Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multipath interference.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in
with the automatic
tuning method.
The station is too weak.
Use the manual tuning method.
Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna connections
are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and
orient it for best reception.
Use the manual tuning method.
Refer to
page
11, 27
11
11, 27
28
12, 27
12
There are buzzing and
whining noises
(especially in the
evening).
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV.
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps,
motors, thermostats and other electrical
equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This
will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
The remote control cannot control system
components.
45
Depending on the manufacturer or the model,
some components cannot be controlled with this
unit’s remote control even though the code has
been set properly.
Use the original remote control supplied with
your component.
0110V596RDS53-59_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM55
56
SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY
When playing back a source encoded with DTS
Refer to
page
A loud hissing noise is
heard when playing back
a source encoded with
DTS.
The player which plays back the source is not
connected to a digital audio signal input
terminal of this unit.
The player must be connected to a digital audio
signal input terminal of this unit besides the
analog audio signal terminal connections.
The input mode is set to ANALOG on this unit. Set a proper input mode to turn on the built-in
DTS decoder.
A percussive noise is
heard when playing back
a source encoded with
DTS.
If the input mode is set to AUTO, depending on
some sources, there may be a noise heard while
this unit is identifying the format of the input
signal.
Set the input mode of the currently selected
input source to DTS.
No sound is heard when
playing back a source
encoded with DTS, even
if the input mode is set
to AUTO on this unit.
The built-in DTS decoder does not function
because the player has a digital volume control
and it is set at a position other than
“maximum,” “neutral” or “ineffective.”
Set the players digital volume control at the
maximum, neutral or ineffective position.
No sound is heard when
playing back an MD or
DAT on which has been
recorded a source
encoded with DTS.
A source encoded with DTS cannot be recorded
on an MD or DAT.
No sound is heard when
playing back a source
(CD, etc.) even if the
currently selected input
mode is AUTO.
In the AUTO mode, the DTS-decoding mode
cannot be automatically changed to the normal
(PCM) digital signal input mode.
Set the input mode to AUTO again.
Notes
It is necessary to use a DTS decoder to play back a source encoded with DTS, so the player which plays back the source must be connected
to a digital audio input terminal of this unit in the way described in this manual. If this connection is not made or only a D-to-A converter is
being used without using a DTS decoder, only a loud hissing noise will be heard when you play back the source.
The “t” indicator will flash when the input mode is set to AUTO and a search or skip operation is performed while playing back a
source encoded with DTS. If this status continues for 30 or more seconds, the unit will automatically switch from DTS-decoding mode to
PCM digital signal input mode and the “t” indicator will go out.
14
23
23
24
TROUBLESHOOTING
0110V596RDS53-59_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM56
57
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
SPECIFICATIONS
AUDIO SECTION
Minimum RMS Output Power
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms
Main L/R, Center, Rear L/R ....................................... 100 W*/70 W
1 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 ohms
Main L/R, Center, Rear L/R ....................................... 110 W*/80 W
Maximum Output Power (EIAJ)
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ohms ........................................................ 105 W
DIN Standard Output Power
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms ....................................................... 110 W
IEC Output Power
1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ....................................................... 75 W
Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 ohms ..................... 130/150/190/240 W*, 90/110/135/160 W
Damping Factor
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms ................................................................ 80
Frequency Response
CD etc. to MAIN L/R................................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
Total Harmonic Distortion (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
CD etc. to MAIN L/R, 1/2 power, 8 ohms .............................. 0.06%
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
CD etc. to MAIN L/R
(150 mV, Input Shorted) ........................................................ 99 dB
(250 mV, Input Shorted) .......................................................103 dB
Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
MAIN L/R .............................................................................. 150 µV
Input Sensitivity/Impedance
CD etc.................................................................. 150 mV/47 k-ohms
EXT. DECODER ......................................... 150 mV/40 – 47 k-ohms
Output Level/Impedance
REC OUT ........................................................... 150 mV/1.2 k-ohms
PRE OUT ............................................................... 2.1 V/1.2 k-ohms
SUBWOOFER ....................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 k-ohms
PHONES ................................................................. 0.34 V/560 ohms
Channel Separation (Vol. –30 dB)
CD etc. (Input 5.1 k-ohms Terminated, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
..................................................................................... 60 dB/45 dB
Tone Control Characteristics
BASS: Boost/cut .......................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz
TREBLE: Boost/cut ................................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz
* for U.S.A. and Canada models
VIDEO SECTION
Video Signal Type ...........................................................NTSC or PAL
Video Signal Level ...................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms
Signal-to-Noise Ratio .................................................................. 50 dB
Monitor Out Frequency Response.................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
Tuning Range .................................... 87.5/87.50 to 107.9/108.00 MHz
Usable Sensitivity (DIN)
Mono (S/N 26 dB) ................................................................... 0.9 µV
Stereo (S/N 46 dB) ................................................................... 28 µV
Selectivity (two signals, 40 kHz Dev., ±300 kHz) ...................... 55 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (Mono/Stereo)
DIN ................................................................................. 75 dB/69 dB
IHF ................................................................................. 81 dB/75 dB
Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ........................................................................ 0.1/0.2%
Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ........................................................... 48 dB
Frequency Response ........................................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, ±1 dB
Antenna Input ......................................................75 ohms, Unbalanced
AM SECTION
Tuning Range ............................................530/531 to 1,710/1,611 kHz
Usable Sensitivity ................................................................. 300 µV/m
Signal-to-Noise Ratio ...................................................................52 dB
Antenna ........................................................................... Loop antenna
GENERAL
Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Europe, U.K. and Singapore models] .................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Australia model]..................................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[China model]......................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[General model].............................AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption ...................................................... approx. 310 W
Power Consumption (standby mode) .................................approx. 1 W
AC Outlets (100 W max. total)
[U.K. and Australia models] ..................................... 1 (SWITCHED)
[Other models].......................................................... 2 (SWITCHED)
Dimensions (W x H x D)
.....................435 x 151 x 391 mm (17-1/8’ x 5-15/16’ x 15-3/8’’)
Weight ......................................................................... 11.2 kg (25 lbs.)
Accessories ................................................................ AM loop antenna
.......................................................................... Indoor FM antenna
.....................75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only)
........................ Antenna adapter (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
.................................................................................Remote control
........................................................................................... Batteries
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
0110V596RDS53-59_EN 9/29/0, 10:08 AM57
58
GLOSSARY
CINEMA DSP
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses four discrete channels and five
speakers to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects:
two main channels (left and right), a center channel for
dialog, and a rear channel for special sound effects. The rear
channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range.
Most video tapes and laser discs include Dolby Surround
encoding, as do many TV and cable broadcasts. The Dolby
Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that stabilizes each channel for
even more accurate sound positioning than is available with
standard analog processors.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that
provides completely independent multi-channel audio to
you. Dolby Digital provides five full-range channels in what
is sometimes referred to as a “3/2” configuration: three front
channels (left, center and right), and two surround channels.
A sixth bass-only effect channel is also provided for output
of LFE (low frequency effect), or low bass effects that are
independent of other channels. (This is called the “LFE
channel”.) This channel is counted as 0.1, thus giving rise to
the term 5.1 channels in total.
The wide dynamic range of sound reproduced by the five
full-range channels and precise sound orientation by digital
sound processing provides listeners with excitement and
realism that have never been experienced before.
DTS (Digital Theater System)
Digital Surround
DTS was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of
movies with six discrete channels of digital soundtracks,
and it is now installed in many theaters around the world.
The DTS digital playback system changed the way we
experienced movies in theaters with six discrete channels of
superb digital audio.
DTS technology, through intense research and development
has made it possible to deliver similar encode/decode
discrete technology to home audio surround-sound
entertainment.
DTS Digital Surround is an encode/decode system which
delivers six channels of master-quality, 20-bit audio;
technically, it is 5.1 channels, which means 5 full-range
(left, center, right and two surround) channels, plus a
subwoofer (LFE) channel (as “0.1”). It is compatible with
the 5.1 speaker configurations that are currently available
for home theater systems.
CINEMA DSP
The Dolby Surround and Dolby Digital sound and DTS
systems show their full ability in a large movie theater,
because movie sounds are originally designed to be
reproduced in a large movie theater that uses a multitude of
speakers. Trying to create a sound environment similar to
that of a movie theater in your home is difficult because of
the room size, material inside the walls, the number of
speakers, and so on. In other words, your listening room is
very different from a movie theater.
However, YAMAHA DSP technology allows you to create
nearly the same sound experience as that of a large movie
theater in your home by compensating for the lack of
presence and dynamics in the listening room with original
digital sound fields combined with Dolby Surround, Dolby
Digital or DTS Digital Surround sounds.
The YAMAHA “CINEMA DSP” logo indicates those
programs that are created by the combination of YAMAHA
DSP technology and Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or
DTS.
LFE 0.1 Channel
This channel is for reproduction of low bass signals. The
frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is called the channel 0.1 because it only reproduces
a low frequency range compared to the full-range from
20 Hz to 20 kHz that is reproduced by the 5 channels in a
Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel system.
S VIDEO Signal
The S VIDEO signal is separated and transmitted as the Y
signal which indicates the luminance and the C signal which
indicates the chroma of the video signal (composite signal).
Using the S VIDEO terminal eliminates video signal
transmission loss and allows recording and playback of
even more beautiful images.
0110V596RDS53-59_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM58
59
EnglishBASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION APPENDIXINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
INDEX
A
Accessories .......................................................................... 2
AC outlet ........................................................................... 18
Antennas ...................................................................... 11, 12
B
BALANCE ........................................................................ 22
BGV (background video) function .................................... 22
C
Canceling sound effect ...................................................... 26
CINEMA DSP ............................................................. 37, 58
Connections
Antennas................................................................ 11, 12
Audio components (tape deck/MD recorder, CD player
and turntable) .............................................................. 13
Digital connections...................................................... 14
Speakers ...................................................................... 16
TV monitor .................................................................. 14
Video components (DVD/LD player, VCR, TV/digital
TV and cable TV/satellite tuner) ................................. 14
D
Delay time (TIME/LEVEL mode) .................................... 42
Display................................................................................. 6
Dolby Digital ..................................................................... 58
Dolby Surround ................................................................. 58
DSP program ...................................................... 25, 35 to 37
DTS Digital Surround ....................................................... 58
E
External decoder ................................................................ 15
F
Front panel........................................................................... 4
I
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch ................................... 18
Input mode......................................................................... 23
L
LFE ........................................................................ 40, 41, 58
M
Muting ............................................................................... 22
P
Playing ............................................................................... 21
Preset stations
To recall a preset station .............................................. 29
Exchanging preset stations .......................................... 30
Preset tuning
Automatic preset tuning .............................................. 28
Manual preset tuning................................................... 29
R
RDS mode
EON function .............................................................. 33
PTY SEEK function .................................................... 32
Recording .......................................................................... 34
Remote control
Basic operations ........................................................ 7, 8
Batteries......................................................................... 2
Factory-set code .......................................................... 52
Manufacturers codes .......... i (at the end of this manual)
Selector dial............................................................. 7, 45
Setup codes.................................................................. 51
S
SET MENU ....................................................................... 38
Sleep timer......................................................................... 44
Speaker
Output levels (TIME/LEVEL mode) .......................... 42
Output mode (SET MENU) .................................. 39, 40
Speaker balance (test tone).......................................... 19
Placement ...................................................................... 9
STANDBY/ON.................................................................... 4
T
Test tone....................................................................... 19, 20
Tone controls ..................................................................... 22
Tuning
Automatic tuning......................................................... 27
Manual tuning ............................................................. 27
0110V596RDS53-59_EN 2/29/0, 3:30 PM59
i
LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES
LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT
VERZEICHNIS DER HERSTELLERCODES
LISTA ÖVER TILLVERKARKODER
ELENCO DEI CODICI DEL FABBRICANTE
LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE FABRICANTES
LIJST VAN CODES VAN FABRIKANT
TV
ADMIRAL 0411, 0451, 0911,
1021, 1081
AIKO 0891
AKAI 0061, 0101, 0231,
1191, 1351, 1591,
1641, 1791, 1891,
1981
AKURA 1331
ALBA 1241, 1331, 2361
ALBIRAL 1971
AMSTRAD 1301, 1511
ANAM 1171
ARC EN CIEL 0571
ARCAM 0571, 0761
ARISTONA 0751
ARTHUR MARTIN 0451, 1641
ASA 0411, 0451, 0521,
0781, 0871, 1021,
1081, 1421, 2051,
2091, 2151, 2551
ASTRA 1511
ATANTIC 0761
ATLANTIC 0761
ATORI 1511
AUDIOSONIC 1181, 1321, 1511
AUSIND 0491, 1411
AUTOVOX 0091, 0351, 0481,
0491, 0601, 0781,
0951, 1051, 1081,
1391, 1421
BAIRD 1101, 1351
BANG & OLUFSEN 1081
BASIC LINE 1321, 1331
BAUER 1451
BAUR 0041, 0061, 0121,
0131, 0221, 1561
BEKO 2491, 2501
BLAUPUNKT 0221, 0231, 0241,
0251, 0471, 0741,
2201, 2211, 2221,
2231, 2241, 2261,
2571, 2581
BRANDT 0571, 0651, 0731,
0901, 1821
BRIONVEGA 1021, 1051, 1081
BRITANNIA 0761
BRUNS 0821, 0991, 1021,
1081
BSR 0391, 0691, 1621,
1901, 1981
BUSH 0451, 1241, 1331,
1641, 1741, 2131,
2151
BUSH (UK) 0481, 1561, 1611
CANDLE 0791
CENTURY 1021, 1081
CGE 0491, 0811, 0981,
1401, 1531, 1611,
1621, 1981, 2201,
2251, 2271
CITIZEN 0791
CLARIVOX 0821, 0961, 1971
CLATRONIC 1181, 1331
CONCERTO 0791
CONDOR 0761
CONTEC 0151, 1171
CONTINENTAL EDISON
0571, 0651, 0901
CRAIG 1171
CROSLEY 0021, 0491, 1021,
1081, 1401, 1981,
2201, 2251, 2271
CROWN 2541
CTC CLATRONIC 0261
CXC 1171
DAEWOO 0101, 1501, 1511,
2611
DANSAI 0101
DECCA 0271, 0581, 0601,
0971, 1101, 1691
DECCA (UK) 0271, 0581, 0601,
1101, 1681
DEGRAAF 0451, 1351
DIXI 0991, 1511
DOMEOS 0101
DORIC 1031
DUAL 0091, 0601, 1611,
1641, 2101
DUAL-TEC 0601, 1511, 1621,
2111
DUMONT 0261, 0521, 0781,
1021, 1081, 1981,
2121, 2151
DYNATRON 0101
ELBE 1551, 1971, 2031
ELECTRO TECH 1511
ELEKTRONSKA 0771
ELMAN 0261, 1621
ELTA 1511
EMERSON 0921, 1021, 1081,
1121, 1171, 1261,
1301
ERRES 0101
ETRON 1981
EUROPHON 0261, 0581, 0601,
0771, 1091, 1621,
2001
FENNER 0101, 1511
FERGUSON 0281, 0371, 0551,
0651, 0781, 0861,
0881, 1131, 1181,
1361, 1461, 1971,
1991, 2281, 2311,
2341
FIDELITY 0451, 0761, 2281
FIDELITY (UK) 0561, 0591,
1931, 2281
FILMNET 1141
FINLANDIA 0451, 2321
FINLUX 0021, 0261, 0491,
0521, 0781, 0811,
0871, 1081, 1411,
1421, 1981, 2051,
2091, 2121, 2151,
2551
FIRST LINE 1981
FISHER 0021, 0091, 0141,
0511, 0601, 0801,
0821, 0981, 1021,
1081, 1981, 2091
FORGESTONE 2281
FORMENTI 0451, 0491, 0761,
1081, 1451, 1541,
1981
FORMENTI-PHOENIX
0021, 0431, 0451,
0591, 1411
FORTRESS 1081
FRONTECH 0451, 1181, 1981
FUJITSU 1261
FUNAI 0391, 0691, 1171,
1181, 1261
FUTURETECH 1171
GBC 0021, 0141, 1321,
1511, 1621, 1981
GEC 0451, 1101, 1281,
2321
GEC (UK) 0031, 0081, 0581,
0601, 1101, 1281,
1561
GELOSO 0021, 0411, 0451,
1321, 1511, 1621,
1981
GENERAL TECHNIC2681
GENEXXA 0451, 1331
GOLDSTAR 0591, 0601, 0761,
0791, 1371, 1491,
1511, 1561, 1621,
1641
GOODMANS 0141, 1101, 1371,
1641, 2301
GORENJE 0981, 1061
GRAETZ 0451
GRANADA 0141, 0451, 0491,
0581, 0601, 1101,
1111, 1351, 1981,
2321
GRANADA (UK) 0081, 0141,
0451, 0491,
0581, 0601,
1031, 1311,
1521, 1561,
1641
GRUNDIG 0221, 0231, 0471,
0491, 0711, 0741,
1381, 2021, 2041,
2141, 2151
HANSEATIC 0021, 0121, 0141,
0431, 0591, 1561
HANTAREX 0581
HEMMERMANN 0061
HIFIVOX 0331, 0571
HINARI 0071, 0141, 0451,
1261, 1351, 1511,
1641, 1981, 2011
HITACHI 0001, 0011, 0031,
0081, 0141, 0291,
0331, 0341, 0451,
0601, 0631, 0701,
1281, 1561, 1601,
1821, 1831, 1841,
1861, 1871, 1881,
1891, 1941, 1981,
2051, 2321, 2341
HYPER 0591, 0601, 1511,
1621
IMPERIAL 0451, 0491, 0811,
0981, 1401, 1611,
1621, 2201, 2251,
2271
INGERSOL 1511
INNO HIT 0581, 0601, 0841,
1101, 1331, 1371,
1511, 2011
INNOVATION 2591, 2601, 2611,
2621, 2641, 2651,
2661, 2711, 2721,
2761, 2771, 2781
INTERFUNK 0031, 0041, 0061,
0121, 0181, 0451,
0491, 1081, 1641,
1791, 1821, 1981,
2231
IRRADIO 0491, 1321, 1331,
1371, 1411, 1511,
2011
ISUKAI 1331
ITT 0031, 0041, 0051,
0061, 0071, 0081,
0181, 0411, 0451,
0491, 1241, 1291,
1351, 1501, 1601,
1641, 1741, 1921,
1981, 2091, 2331,
2431
ITT-NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051,
0061, 0071, 0081,
0181, 0411, 0451,
0491, 1241, 1291,
1351, 1501, 1601,
1641, 1741, 1921,
1981, 2091, 2331,
2431
JVC 0071, 0721, 1441,
1581, 1591, 1741,
1791
KAISUI 0591, 1321, 1331
KAMOSONIC 0601
KARCHER 0591, 0601, 0841,
1091, 1321, 1511,
1561, 2051
KAWASHO 0761
KENDO 0261
KENNEDY 0021, 0351, 0951,
1981
KONKA 2701
KORTING 0431, 1011, 1021,
1081, 1541
08V596RDS_code(EU) 2/29/0, 7:00 PM1
ii
KTV 0601, 1171
LENOIR 0601, 1511
LEYEO 1181
LIFETEC 2591, 2601, 2611,
2621, 2641, 2651,
2661, 2671, 2681,
2691, 2711, 2761,
2771, 2781
LOEWE OPTA 0121, 0131, 0581,
0611, 1081
LOGIC 1691, 2281
LOGIK 0551, 1681, 2281
LOWEWE 0831
LUMA 0351, 0451, 1901
LUXMAN 0791
LUXMAN STEREO TUNER
0791
LUXOR 0001, 0061, 0181,
0341, 0421, 0451,
0461, 0491, 0601,
0671, 1351, 1371,
1561, 1601, 1911,
1921, 1981
LYCO 1181
MAGNADYNE 0021, 0061, 0261,
0581, 0641, 0771,
1021, 1081, 1621,
1981
MAGNAFON 0261, 0491, 0581,
0591, 0641, 0761,
1091, 2001
MANESTH 0101
MARANTZ 0101
MARELLI 1081
MARK 0101
MATSUI 0061, 0451, 0601,
0691, 1101, 1151,
1241, 1271, 1301,
1511, 1561, 1681,
1691
MAXIMAL 0071, 1981
MCMICHAEL 1281
MEDION 2591, 2601, 2611,
2621, 2641, 2651,
2661, 2671, 2681,
2691, 2711, 2721,
2761, 2771, 2781
MEMOREX 1511
METZ 0231, 0741, 1001,
1041, 1081, 1481,
2071, 2081
MGA 1231
MICROMAXX 2591, 2621, 2641,
2651, 2711, 2761,
2771, 2781
MINERVA 0221, 0231, 0491,
1381, 2141, 2151
MISTRAL 2281
MITSUBISHI 0141, 0201, 0231,
0661, 1191, 1201,
1231, 1671, 1691,
1741
MIVAR 0491, 0501, 0581,
0591, 0761, 0771,
1371, 1431, 2031
MTC 0791
MULTITECH 0261, 0581, 0601,
0641, 0981, 1321,
1511
MURPHY 0451, 2091
MURPHY (UK) 0081, 1031
N.E.I. 0101, 0961
NAD 1341
NEC 0141, 1711, 1721,
1731
NECKERMANN 0451, 0601,
0981, 1081,
1561, 1931,
1981, 2211,
2231, 2241
NEDIATOR 0101
NICAMAGIC 0761
NIKKAI 1101, 1331, 1641,
1701, 2011
NOBLIKO 0261, 0491, 0591,
0641, 1381, 1411
NOGAMATIC 0571
NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051,
0061, 0071, 0081,
0181, 0411, 0451,
0491, 1241, 1291,
1351, 1501, 1601,
1641, 1741, 1921,
1981, 2091, 2331,
2431, 2461, 2791
NORDMENDE 0031, 0291, 0331,
0451, 0531, 0541,
0571, 1051, 1131,
1591, 1791, 1811,
1821, 1891, 1941,
2631
OCEANIC 0321, 1651, 1981
OCEANIC (F) 0031, 0061, 0321,
0441, 1661
ONCEAS 0601
ONWA 1171
ORION 0061, 0391, 0691,
0851, 1211, 1241,
1251, 1301, 1481,
1511, 1681, 1691,
1981, 2371, 2421
OSAKA 2011
OSAKI 1101, 1331, 2011
OSUME 0151
OTTO VERSAND 0021, 0121,
0141, 0221,
0601, 1561,
1741, 1981
PAEL 0591, 1411
PANASONIC 0031, 0201, 0211,
0451, 0701, 1311,
1751, 1961, 2561,
2741
PANORAMIC 2351
PATHE MARCONI 0571
PATHE’ CINEMA (F) 0431, 0591,
1621, 1661,
1971
PAUSA 1511
PAUZA 1511
PERDIO 0891, 1101
PHILCO 0021, 0491, 0811,
0981, 1021, 1081,
1401, 1611, 1621,
1751, 2201, 2251,
2271, 2451, 2471
PHILIPS 0101, 0361, 0591,
0621, 0681, 0751,
0761, 1021, 1081,
1281, 2031, 2281,
2291, 2431, 2441,
2511, 2731
PHOENIX 1081
PHONOLA 0751, 1081
PIONEER 0291, 0451, 1341,
1821
PRANDONI-PRINCE 0411, 0451,
0491, 0581,
1411
PRANDONI-PROMCE
0451, 0491, 0581
PRIMA 0451
PROFEX 1981
PROTECH 0641, 1181, 1981
QUELLE 0041, 0061, 0121,
0221, 0231, 0391,
0491, 0521, 0601,
0781, 1371, 1381,
1411, 1421, 1641,
1681, 2051, 2091,
2141, 2151, 2201,
2211, 2231, 2241,
2251, 2271, 2551,
2571, 2581
REDIOMARELLI 0101, 0451,
0661, 0771,
1081
RADIONETTE 0031, 2051, 2091
RADIOLA 2291
RANK 0481, 2151
RBM 2131, 2151
RBM (UK) 0481
REDIFFUSION 0451, 0661, 1641,
1981, 2331
REDIFFUSION (UK) 0061, 0081,
1031
REX 0071, 0101, 0351,
0411, 0451, 0951,
1901, 2061, 2101,
2111
RFT 0991, 2511
ROADSTAR 1321, 1511
ROTEL 0151
SABA 0291, 0331, 0421,
0451, 0531, 0541,
0571, 0581, 0651,
0731, 0931, 1021,
1071, 1081, 1131,
1791, 1811, 1821,
1891, 1941, 2631
SACCS 1971
SAISHO 0451, 0601, 1161,
1241, 1301, 1511,
1671, 1681, 1691
SALORA 0011, 0041, 0061,
0071, 0341, 0451,
0671, 1291, 1351,
1521, 1561, 1601,
1641, 1911, 1921,
1931, 1981, 2321
SAMBERS 0261, 0491, 0581,
0641, 1091, 1371,
1411, 2001
SAMSUNG 0101, 0601, 0841,
0981, 1101, 1181,
1371, 1511, 2011
SANYO 0141, 0151, 0401,
0601, 0801, 0821,
0981, 1021, 1101,
1111, 1291, 1351,
1691, 1741, 2051,
2091, 2551
SBR 0681, 0751, 1281,
2281
SCHAUB LORENZ 0451
SCHNEIDER 0021, 0071, 0091,
0451, 0511, 0591,
0601, 0751, 1321,
1361, 1621, 1641,
2101, 2111, 2291
SCOTT 1171, 1261
SEG 0261, 0601, 0821,
0991
SEI 0641, 0691, 1081,
1301, 1481, 1981
SELECO 0071, 0101, 0351,
0411, 0451, 0951,
1901, 2061, 2101,
2111
SENTRA 1601
SHARP 0141, 0151, 0191,
1761, 1781
SIAREM 0021, 0261, 0581,
0641, 1021, 1081,
1981
SICATEL 1971
SIEMENS 0151, 0221, 0231,
0451, 0741, 2011,
2201, 2211, 2221,
2231, 2241, 2261,
2571, 2581
SILVER 1181
SINGER 0021, 0261, 1021,
1081
SINUDYNE 0021, 0061, 0101,
0261, 0391, 0641,
0691, 0851, 0941,
1021, 1081, 1241,
1301, 1321, 1481,
1631, 1981
SKANTIC 0451
SOLAVOX 0451, 1641, 2011
SONOKO 0101, 1181, 1511
SONY 0141, 0171, 1121,
1681, 1691, 2751
SOUNDESIGN 1171
SSS 1171
STERN 0071, 0101, 0351,
0411, 0451, 0951,
1901, 2061, 2101,
2111
SUNKAI 0691
SUPRA 0791
TANDBERG 0161, 0331, 0611,
1021, 1421, 1771,
1791, 2081
TANDY 0191, 0451, 1331,
1531
TASHIKO 0141
TATUNG 0271, 0581, 0601,
0971, 1101, 1681,
1691
TCM 2621, 2641, 2711,
2761, 2771, 2781
TECHNICS 1311
TECHWOOD 0791
TEKNIKA 1171, 1231, 1261
TELE 1141
TELEAVIA 0571, 0651, 0731,
1821
TELEFUNKEN 0291, 0301, 0311,
0551, 0731, 1131,
1471, 1591, 1791,
1801, 1811, 1821,
1991, 2161, 2171,
2181, 2191, 2201,
2251, 2271, 2521,
2631
TELETECH 1511
TEMPEST 2381, 2391, 2401,
2411
TENSAI 1331, 2091
TEXET 0601
THOMSON 0331, 0481, 0531,
0571, 0631, 0651,
0731, 0901, 1241,
1571, 1591, 1791,
1811, 1821, 1891,
1941, 2531
THORN 0741, 0861, 2091,
2251, 2271, 2281
08V596RDS_code(EU) 2/29/0, 7:00 PM2
iii
THORN-FERGUSON 0281, 0371,
0551, 0651,
0781, 0861,
0881, 1131,
1181, 1361,
1461, 1971,
1991, 2281
TMK 0141, 0791, 1471
TOSHIBA 0141, 0381, 0481,
1221, 1271, 1701,
1741, 1851, 2151,
2801, 2811
TRANS CONTINENS
0451
TRISTAR 2281
TRIUMPH 0481, 0581, 2121
UHER 0431, 0451, 0481,
0491, 0511, 1311,
1541
ULTRAVOX 0021, 0261, 0591,
1021, 1081, 1981
UNIVERSUM 1181, 2051
UNIVOX 1971
VEGAVOX 0811
VEXA 0101, 1511
VICTOR 1441, 1591
VIDEOTON 2481
VORTEC 0101, 0651
VOXSON 0411, 0451, 0491,
1021, 1081
WALTHAM 0451
WATSON 0431, 2201, 2241
WATT RADIO 0021, 0061, 0261,
0591, 0641, 0761,
1091, 1971, 1981,
2001
WEGA 0141, 1081, 1981
WEGA COLOR 1021
WELTBLICK 0101
WESTON 1621
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0101, 0261, 0431,
0591, 0761, 1401,
1541
YOKO 0601, 1511
ZANUSSI 0071, 0101, 0351,
0411, 0451, 0951,
1901, 2061, 2101,
2111
ZOPPAS 0451
CABLE TV
CABLETIME 1446, 1456, 1476
CLYDE CABLEVISION
1426
FILMNET 1396, 1436
FRANCE TELECOM 1386
GEC 1426
JERROLD 1416
MOVIE TIME 1466
NSC 1466
PHILIPS 1386
PIONEER 0006
SAMSUNG 1496
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
1486, 1506
STARCOM 1416
STS 1466
TANDBERG 1366
TELE 1436
TELE +1 1436
TELESERVICE 1406, 1476
TUDI 1376
UNITED CABLE 1416
ZENITH 1406
SATELLITE TUNER
AKAI 1276
ALBA 0826, 1276
AMSTRAD 0166, 0796, 1016,
1026, 1296
ANKARO 0476
AST 0406
ASTRA 0126
BARCOM 0476
BLAUPUNKT 0966
BMC SATELLITE 0106
BRITISH TELECOM 1276
BUSH 0826
BUSH (UK) 0956
CAMBRIDGE 0196, 1276
CANAL PLUS (FRANCE)
1536
CHAPARRAL 0016, 0696, 1006
COLUMBUS 0616
CONNEXIONS 0306, 0426
DISCUS ELIPSE 0856, 0866
DISKXPRESS 0426, 0476
DRAKE 1516
ECHOSTAR 0226, 0236, 0606,
0626, 0666, 0926,
0996, 1046, 1056,
1066, 1106
ELTA 1286
ELTA SAT 0146
EURODEC 1226, 1236, 1246
FERGUSON 0046, 0176, 0186,
0296, 0846, 0956,
1306
FINLUX 0976
FRACARRO 0026, 0536, 0776
FUBA 0476, 0616, 0636,
1056
GIUCAR RECORD 0206, 0336
GRUNDIG 0176, 0946, 0956,
0966
HIGH PERFORMANCE
0916
HIRSCHMANN 0756, 0966
HITACHI 0446, 0516, 0706,
0946
ICX INTERNATIONAL 0886
ITT 0066, 0126, 0176,
0446, 1156
ITT/NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176,
0446, 1156
JEEMON 0146
JERROLD 0846, 0986
JOHANSSON 0246
JVC 1276
KATHREIN 0116, 0266, 0276,
0366
KOSMOS 0266
KYOSTAR 1036, 1086
LENG 0246
LIFESAT 1326, 1346, 1356
LUXOR 0126, 0136, 0446,
0466, 0506, 1156
MACAB 0356
MASPRO 0016, 0116, 0256,
0956
MEDION 1326, 1346
METZ 0966
MICROMAXX 1326, 1346
MITSUBISHI 0966
MORGANS 0596
MURATTO 0406
NEC 0286, 0316, 0766,
0786, 0836
NETWORK 0046
NIKKO 1136, 1146
NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176,
0446, 1156, 1166,
1336
NORSAT 0786
OTTO VERSAND 0966
PACE 0046, 0176, 0296,
0936, 0956, 1306,
1566, 1576
PACE MSS 0946
PALCOM 0616, 0686, 0706
PALSAT 0396
PALTEC 0706
PANASONIC 0806, 1306
PANSAT 1076
PHILIPS 0326, 0346, 0476,
0956, 1126, 1186,
1196, 1206, 1216,
1306, 1316
PROSAT 1176
PTT TELECOM 0306, 0896
QUELLE 0966
RADIX 1056
REDIFFUSION 0316, 0786
RFT 1186, 1196, 1206,
1216
SAGEM 1256, 1546
SAKURA 0566, 0816
SALORA 0066, 0126, 0136,
0446, 0456, 0486,
0496, 0576
SAMSUNG 0746, 0756
SAT 0406
SATCOM 0896
SATECO 0646
SECTOR 1266
SEDEA 1096
SENTRA 0416
SIEMENS 0896, 0966
SINTRACK 0906
SKY DIGITAL BOX 1526
SKYLAB 0476
SKYSCAN 0876
SONY 0736, 0946
STELLA 0306
STRONG 0156, 0396, 1036,
1086
STV 0636
TANDBERG 1116
TANDY 0916
TANTEC 0616
TATUNG 0516, 0546
TECHNISAT 0086, 0096, 0526,
0556, 1056
TELECOM 0306
TELEMAX 0586
THORN-FERGUSON 0046, 0076,
0176, 0186,
0956
TOSHIBA 0946
TPS (FRANCE) 1546
TRIAD 0406
UNIDEN 0036, 0216, 0676,
0716, 0726
US ELECTRONICS 0886
VORTEC 0756, 1036, 1076
VTECH 0436
WINERSAT 0246
WISI 0056, 0356, 0376,
0386, 0406, 0656,
1056, 1156
WOLSEY 0916
XCOM MULTIMEDIA 1556
XSAT (FRANCE) 1556
ZEHNDER 0266, 0406
ZENDER 0406
VCR
AIWA 0042, 0352, 0432
AKAI 0042, 0422, 0492,
0582, 0612, 0642,
0652, 0762, 0912
ALBA 0002, 0112, 0282,
0332, 0342, 0972
AMSTRAD 0322, 0432, 0452
ANITECH 0002
ANITSCH 1002
ASA 0012, 0052
AUDIOSONIC 0002
BAIRD 0042, 0282, 0492
BANG & OLUFSEN 0042
BAUR 0052, 0062, 0812
BLAUPUNKT 0062, 0092, 0252,
0462, 0672, 0992
BRIONVEGA 0032
BUSH 0002, 0282, 0332,
0342, 0512, 0972
BUSH (UK) 0812
CAPEHART 0112
CGE 0042, 0432, 0762
CRAIG 0072, 0482
CROWN 0112, 0282, 0622
DAEWOO 0112, 0282, 0622
DANSAI 0012
DAYTRON 0112
DECCA 0042, 0052, 0432,
0942
DECCA (UK) 0052
DEGRAAF 0052, 0132, 0432,
0532, 0602
DIXI 0442
DUAL 0042, 0632
DUMONT 0052, 0432, 0532
DYNATECH 0432
DYNATRON 0012
ELBE 0122
ELIN 0072
EMERSON 0012, 0162, 0202,
0432, 0512, 0522
ERRES 0012
FERGUSON 0042, 0712, 0722,
0852, 0902, 1012,
1022, 1082
FIDELITY 0432
FINLANDIA 0052, 0532
FINLUX 0012, 0042, 0052,
0082, 0262, 0382,
0432, 0462, 0492,
0532, 0572, 0602,
0912
FIRST LINE 0002, 0912
FISHER 0162, 0482, 0532,
0542, 0572, 0592
FORMENTI-PHOENIX
0012, 0052
FRONTECH 0112
FUNAI 0432
GBC 0002
GEC (UK) 0022, 0052
GELOSO 0002
GENERAL TECHNIC1172
GOLDSTAR 0012, 0122, 0812,
0952
GOODMANS 0002, 0072, 0282,
0432, 0502
GOODMANS (UK) 0002
GRAETZ 0022, 0042
GRANADA 0052, 0132, 0532,
0572
GRANADA (UK) 0052, 0092,
0462, 0602,
0812, 0822
08V596RDS_code(EU) 2/29/0, 7:00 PM3
iv
GRUNDIG 0052, 0062, 0092,
0232, 0252, 0262,
0752, 0802
HANSEATIC 0052, 0812
HARMAN/KARDON 0122, 0922
HCM 0002
HINARI 0002, 0202, 0412,
0442, 0522
HITACHI 0042, 0172, 0292,
0432, 0602, 0662,
0812, 1022
IMPERIAL 0072, 0432
INGERSOL 0442
INNO HIT 0002, 0052, 0072
INNOVATION 1142, 1162, 1172
INTERFUNK 0022, 0052
IRRADIO 0002, 0012
ITT 0022, 0032, 0042,
0072, 0292, 0492,
0532, 0572, 0762
ITT-NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042,
0072, 0292, 0492,
0532, 0572, 0762
JENSEN 0042
JVC 0042, 0102, 0142,
0272, 0742, 0762,
0782, 0902
KARCHER 0052, 0072, 0812
KENDO 0492
KENWOOD 0042, 0142, 0572
LIFETEC 1142, 1162, 1172
LLOYD 0432
LOEWE OPTA 0052, 0092, 0152
LOGIK 0002, 0072, 0442
LUMA 0162
LUXOR 0492, 0572, 0812
M ELECTRONIC 0432
MAGNADYNE 0052
MAGNASONIC 0572
MANESTH 0012
MARANTZ 0012, 0052, 0092,
0122, 0502
MARK 0012
MARTA 0012
MATSUI 0012, 0442, 0512,
0522, 0812, 0972
MEDION 1142, 1162, 1172
MEMOREX 0012, 0132, 0432,
0482, 0532, 0572
METZ 0062, 0092, 0932
MGA 0912
MICROMAXX 1142, 1162, 1172
MINERVA 0062, 0092, 0252
MINOLTA 0172, 0602
MITSUBISHI 0052, 0062, 0142,
0912, 0922
MTC 0072, 0432
MULTITECH 0002, 0052, 0062,
0282, 0432
MURPHY 0432
N.E.I. 0012, 0052
NATIONAL 0462
NEC 0042, 0122, 0142,
1202
NECKERMANN 0032, 0042,
0052, 0072,
0092, 0202,
0522, 0572,
0762, 0812
NIKKAI 0112
NOBLIKO 0092
NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042,
0072, 0292, 0492,
0532, 0572, 0762,
1152
NORDMENDE 0042, 0102, 0142,
0192, 0222, 0242,
0392, 0402, 0632,
0732, 0742, 0762,
0782, 0792, 0832,
0842, 0872
OLYMPUS 0462
OPTONICA 0132, 0502
ORION 0162, 0202, 0312,
0442, 0512, 0522,
0982
OSAKA 0432
OSAKI 0002, 0012, 0432
OTTO VERSAND 0052, 0062,
0812
PANASONIC 0022, 0212, 0462,
0672, 0992, 1092,
1102, 1182
PENTAX 0172, 0602
PERDIO 0432
PHILCO 1062
PHILIPS 0052, 0082, 0092,
0152, 0182, 0362,
0372, 0382, 0472,
0502, 1072
PHONOLA 0052, 0152
PILOT 0012
PIONEER 0052, 0142, 0372,
0472
PORTLAND 0112
PROLINE 0432
PYE 0052, 0152
QUARTZ 0572
QUELLE 0012, 0032, 0042,
0052, 0062, 0072,
0092, 0202, 0462,
0522, 0942
RADIONETTE 0022
REALISTIC 0012, 0072, 0132,
0432, 0482, 0502,
0532, 0572
RET 1072
REX 0042, 0742, 0782
RICOH 0952
SABA 0042, 0142, 0192,
0222, 0242, 0392,
0632, 0732, 0742,
0762, 0772, 0782,
0792, 0872
SAISHO 0162, 0202, 0292,
0442, 0512, 0522,
0972
SALORA 0192, 0572, 0812,
0822, 0912
SAMSUNG 0052, 0072, 0622,
0652, 1192
SANSUI 0042, 0142
SANYO 0482, 0532, 0562,
0572
SBR 0052, 0152, 0182
SCHAUB LORENZ 0022, 0042
SCHNEIDER 0002, 0012, 0052,
0072, 0432
SEG 0002, 0072
SEI-SINUDYNE 0442
SELECO 0042
SENTRA 0112
SHARP 0132, 0502, 0702
SHINTOM 0002
SIEMENS 0062, 0092, 0252,
0572
SINUDYNE 0052, 0382, 0442,
0932
SONOKO 0282
SONY 0432, 0552, 0682,
0692, 0942, 0952,
0962, 1122, 1132
STS 0602
SUNKAI 0512
SUNSTAR 0432
SYLVANIA 0432, 0912
SYMPHONIC 0432, 0912
TANDBERG 0062, 0162, 0522,
0932
TASHIKO 0132, 0432
TATUNG 0042, 0052, 0432,
0922
TCM 1142, 1162, 1172
TEAC 0042, 0432
TECHNICS 0462
TEKNIKA 0012, 0432
TELEFUNKEN 0042, 0192, 0632,
0732, 0742, 0762,
0782, 0882, 0892
TEMPEST 1032, 1042, 1052
TENOSAL 0002
THOMSON 0042, 0102, 0142,
0192, 0402, 0632,
0762
THORN 0042, 0902
THORN-FERGUSON 0042, 0222,
0302, 0712,
0722, 0742,
0762, 0852,
0862, 0872,
0902
TMK 0522
TONSAI 0002
TOSHIBA 0042, 0622, 0912,
1212
TOTEVISION 0012, 0072
TRIUMPH 0922
UHER 0042, 0072
ULTRAVOX 0032
UNITECH 0072
VECTOR RESEARCH
0122
VICTOR 0042, 0102, 0142
VIDEON 1162, 1172
WELTBLICK 0012
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0032
XENON 0162
YOKO 0012, 0062, 0072
DVD PLAYER
AKAI 0108
JVC 0168, 0348
KENWOOD 0288
MAGNAVOX 0248
MITSUBISHI 0268
ONKYO 0128, 0248
PANASONIC 0048
PHILIPS 0188, 0248
PIONEER 0208, 0228
PROSCAN 0308
RCA 0308
SAMSUNG 0148
SHARP 0068
SONY 0028
TECHNICS 0048
THOMSON 0328
TOSHIBA 0088, 0248
YAMAHA 0008, 0048
ZENITH 0248
LD PLAYER
AIWA 0137
FUNAI 0137
HITACHI 0047
MAGNAVOX 0077
PANASONIC 0027
PIONEER 0037
RCA 0067
REALISTIC 0137
SAMSUNG 0017, 0087
SONY 0057, 0097, 0107,
0117
VICTOR 0127
YAMAHA 0007
CD PLAYER
ACCUPHASE 0315
ADC 0865
ADCOM 0785, 1015
AKAI 0115, 0125, 0725,
0735, 0745, 0935,
1155
ARCAM 1875
ARCAM-ROTEL 0165
AUDIO-TECHNICA 0835
AUDIOSONIC 0155
AIWA 1105, 1235, 1245,
1765, 1915, 1935
BSR 0875
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB
1075
CARRERA 0555, 0875
CARVER 0825, 1415
CYRUS-ROTEL 0205
DENON 0045, 0955, 1045,
1595, 1795, 1805
DUAL 1005
ELIN 0185
EMERSON 1015, 1285, 1675
FISHER 0105, 0595, 0605,
0825, 1165, 1175
GENEXXA 0525, 0825, 0855,
0875, 0995, 1265,
1285, 1345, 1355,
1485, 1575, 1675,
1715, 1825
GOLDSTAR 0555, 1185, 1195,
1585
GRUNDIG 0175
HARMAN KARDON 0325, 0495,
0565, 1135,
1145, 1155
HITACHI 0065, 0585, 0685,
0945, 1005, 1015,
1225, 1545
INNOVATION 1995, 2005, 2015
ITT-NOKIA 0185
JVC 0385, 0395, 0455,
0575, 0585
KARCHER 0485
KENWOOD 0025, 0055, 0145,
0215, 0595, 0675,
0695, 0705, 0715,
0925, 1355, 1485,
1575, 1675, 1715,
1825
KORTING 0175
LIFETEC 2015
LIGHT CONTROL 1155, 1645,
1655, 1665
LINN 0165, 1875
LUXMAN 0265, 0275, 0795,
0805, 1295, 1305,
1555, 1925
08V596RDS_code(EU) 2/29/0, 7:00 PM4
v
LUXOR 0185, 1895, 1905
MAGNAVOX 1865, 1875
MARANTZ 0165, 0175, 0545,
0665, 1275, 1335,
1405, 1505, 1875,
1955
MATSUSHITA 1095, 1605
MCS 0535
MEDION 0075, 1995, 2005,
2015
MEMOREX 0525, 1015, 1265,
1275, 1285, 1675
MGA 1125
MICROMAXX 2015
MISSION 0165, 1875
MITSUBISHI 1125, 1205
NAD 0135, 0255, 0285,
0295, 0305, 0345,
0755, 0765, 1315,
1325
NAKAMICHI 0635, 0645, 1565
NEC 0405, 0535, 0775,
0785
NECKERMAN 0155, 0225
NIKKO 0835, 1165
OCEANIC 0185
OKANO 0155, 0225
ONKYO 0885, 1385, 1425,
1455, 1515
PANASONIC 1055, 1075, 1615,
1625
PHILIPS 0165, 0175, 0195,
1865, 1875
PIONEER 0095, 0335, 0425,
0435, 0445, 0525,
0855, 1035, 1945
PROTON 0905, 1875
QUASAR 1075
RADIOLA 1845, 1855
RADIOTONE 0485
REALISTIC 0825, 1015, 1265,
1275, 1285, 1575
ROTEL 1875
SABA 1005
SAE 1875
SALORA 0185
SANSUI 0415, 0965, 0975,
0985, 1255, 1675,
1875
SANYO 0625, 0825, 0845,
0915
SCHNEIDER 1845, 1855
SCOTT 1285, 1675
SHARP 0025, 0035, 1025,
1115, 1275, 1635,
1785, 1815, 1825,
1835
SHERWOOD 1275, 1445
SIEMENS 1085
SIGNATURE 1155
SONY 0345, 0355, 0365,
0375, 0865, 1685,
1695, 1705, 1715,
1725, 1735, 1745
SYLVANIA 1875
TANDBERG 1885
TASHIKO 1525
TCM 1985, 2015
TEAC 0235, 0245, 1275,
1365, 1375, 1395,
1435, 1465, 1475
TECHNICS 0465, 0475, 1065,
1075, 1625
TELEFUNKEN 1005
THETA DIGITAL 1865
THOMSON 1005
TOSHIBA 0755, 0765
VECTOR RESEARCH
0555, 0865
VICTOR 0575
YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 1815
MD RECORDER
YAMAHA 0024, 0224
KENWOOD 0214
SONY 0224
TAPE DECK
AKAI 0124
DENON 0204
GRUNDIG 0134
HARMAN 0044
JVC 0194
KENWOOD 0164
KORTING 0134
LUXMAN 0054, 0064, 0074,
0084
MARANTZ 0134, 0144
NAD 0174
ONKYO 0184
PHILIPS 0134, 0144, 0154
PIONEER 0034, 0114
SONY 0094, 0104
YAMAHA 0004, 0014
08V596RDS_code(EU) 2/29/0, 7:00 PM5
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Malaysia ID
V471930-1
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
RX-V596RDS
Natural Sound AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
RX-V596RDS
G B
00RX-V596RDS-cv(ML) 9/29/0, 10:07 AM1
Numeric buttons (MD)
Quick Reference Card
TAPE/MD
AMP/TUN
DSP/TUN
INPUT
PLAY
REC/PAUSE
DSP
DIR A (TAPE)
SKIP– (MD)
REWIND (TAPE)
SEARCH (MD)
Numeric buttons
PLAY
DISC SKIP+/–
DSP
CD
SKIP–
SEARCH
INDEX
INPUT
+10
DISPLAY
PAUSE
SKIP+
STOP
SEARCH
AV POWER
PRESET +/–
DSP
DSP
A/B/C/D/E
d (next), u (back)
j (left), i (right)
Input
selector
buttons
DSP
program
selector
EFFECT
INPUT
DSP
program
selector
EFFECT
INPUT
SET MENU
STANDBY
TEST
Input
selector
buttons
TIME/LEVEL
TV POWER
TV VOLUME
TV INPUT
POWER
VOLUME +/–
SLEEP
MUTE
V479260
+10 (MD)
DECK A/B (TAPE)
DISPLAY (MD)
PAUSE (MD)
DIR B (TAPE)
SKIP+ (MD)
STOP
FAST
FORWARD (TAPE)
SEARCH (MD)
AV POWER
Quick Reference Card
Press this button twice to start recording.
Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour commencer l’enregistrement.
Drücken Sie diese Taste zweimal, um die Aufnahme zu starten.
Tryck två gånger på den här knappen för att börja spela in.
V479260
*1 Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione.
Presione dos veces este botón para empezar a grabar.
Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen.
DISC SKIP+/–
DSP
DVD/LD DVD MENU
CBL/SAT
TV
VCR
TITLE/INDEX
INPUT
Numeric buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
+10
DISPLAY
PAUSE
SKIP+
STOP
SEARCH
AV POWER
AV POWER
Numeric
buttons
AV POWER
Numeric buttons
AV POWER
PLAY
SKIP–
SEARCH
DISC SKIP+/–
RETURN
DSP
TITLE/INDEX
+10
INPUT
DISPLAY
MENU UP
MENU RIGHT
MENU DOWN
MENU
MENU SELECT
MENU LEFT
TITLE
ENTER/
RECALL
INPUT
DISPLAY
+10
PAUSE
STOP
FAST
FORWARD
PLAY
REWIND
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV
POWER
CHANNEL
+/–
DSP
ENTER/
RECALL
+10
INPUT
DISPLAY
VCR PAUSE
VCR STOP
VCR FAST
FORWARD
VCR POWER
TV SLEEP
TV MUTE
VCR PLAY
VCR REC
VCR
REWIND
CHANNEL
+/–
DSP
VCR REC
CHANNEL
+/–
DSP
ENTER
INPUT
+10
DISPLAY/
GUIDE
(SAT)
MENU UP
MENU
RIGHT
MENU
DOWN
MENU
MENU
SELECT
MENU LEFT
RECALL
*1
*1
A
B
*
*
DSP-A5 only
L R COAXIAL OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT
AUDIO OUT S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
DOLBY
DIGITAL
RF OUT
C
V
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
S VIDEO INVIDEO IN
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT
DOLBY DIGITAL
RF IN
DOLBY DIGITAL
RF OUT
R L R L
R L
DVD player LD player
Main speakers A Main speakers B
Rear speakers
Video signal
V573050 RX-V596/DSP-A5
Digital signal
(coaxial)
Digital signal
(optical)
Signal flow
Center speaker
Subwoofer
system
TV Monitor
C
L
R
V
Analog signal
(Europe model)
S Video signal
L R
S
S
S
RF demodulator
C
O
O
V

Transcripción de documentos

GB RX-V596RDS YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 00RX-V596RDS-cv(ML) 1 RX-V596RDS Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING Printed in Malaysia ID V471930 2/29/0, 1:33 PM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1. To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 12. To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC power cord and disconnect the antenna cable when there is an electrical storm. 2. Install this unit in a cool, dry, clean place — away from windows, heat sources, sources of excessive vibration, dust, moisture and cold. Avoid sources of humming (transformers, motors). To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not expose the unit to rain or water. 13. Grounding or polarization — Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization of the unit is not defeated. 3. Never open the cabinet. If something drops into the unit, contact your dealer. 4. Do not use force on switches, controls or connection cables. When moving the unit, first disconnect the power cord and then the cables connected to other component. Never pull the cables themselves. 5. The openings on the cover assure proper ventilation of the unit. If these openings are obstructed, the temperature inside the unit will rise rapidly. Therefore, avoid placing objects against these openings, and install the unit in a well-ventilated area to prevent fire and damage. Be sure to allow a space of at least 20 cm behind, 20 cm on both sides and 30 cm above the top panel of the unit to prevent fire and damage. 6. The voltage used must be the same as that specified on this unit. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may result in fire or other accidents. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from the use of this unit with a voltage other than that specified. 7. Digital signals generated by this unit may interfere with other component such as tuners, receivers and TVs. Move this unit farther away from such component if interference is observed. 8. Always set VOLUME to the “m” position before starting the audio source play. Increase the volume gradually to an appropriate level after playback has been started. 9. Do not attempt to clean the unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 10. Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section regarding common operating errors before concluding that the unit is faulty. 11. When not planning to use this unit for a long period of time (e.g., a vacation), disconnect the AC power cord from the wall outlet. 14. AC outlet — Do not connect audio component to the AC outlet on the rear panel if that component requires more power than the outlet is rated to provide. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note • The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. CAUTION 0101V596RDS_caution_EN 2 2/29/0, 3:28 PM INTRODUCTION FEATURES CONTENTS 5-Channel Power Amplification INTRODUCTION FEATURES .................................................................. 1 CONTENTS ................................................................. 1 GETTING STARTED ................................................. 2 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ............................... 4 Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field Processing Digital Sound Field Processor (DSP) Dolby Pro Logic Decoder Dolby Digital Decoder DTS Decoder CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ....................................................... 9 CONNECTIONS ........................................................ 10 ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE ............ 19 PREPARATION ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ INTRODUCTION ◆ Minimum RMS Output (0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz) Main: 70 W +70 W (8 Ω) Center: 70 W (8 Ω) Rear: 70 W + 70 W (8 Ω) Sophisticated FM/AM Tuner 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning Automatic Preset Tuning Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing) Multi-Functions for RDS Broadcast Reception Other Features PLAYING A SOURCE .............................................. 21 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP) EFFECT .................................................................. 25 TUNING ..................................................................... 27 RECEIVING RDS STATIONS ................................. 31 RECORDING A SOURCE ON TAPE, MD OR VIDEO CASSETTE ............................................... 34 ADVANCED OPERATION SOUND FIELD PROGRAM .................................... 35 SET MENU ................................................................. 38 DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS ................................................. 42 SLEEP TIMER .......................................................... 44 PRESET REMOTE CONTROL .............................. 45 Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and pending. “DTS”, “DTS Digital Surround”, are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved. y indicates a tip for your operation. • When buttons on this unit and the remote control are noted together in this Owner’s Manual, these button names are in principle noted in the order of “button name (remote control button name)”. 1 0102V596RDS01-08_EN 1 2/29/0, 3:28 PM English Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992 – 1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................ 53 SPECIFICATIONS .................................................... 57 GLOSSARY ................................................................ 58 INDEX ........................................................................ 59 APPENDIX APPENDIX ADVANCED OPERATION ◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter ◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 12 Items for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video System ◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future Formats ◆ S Video Signal Input/Output Capability ◆ 3 Optical/2 Coaxial Digital Signal Input Terminals ◆ SLEEP Timer ◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes BASIC OPERATION BASIC OPERATION ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ GETTING STARTED Checking the Package Contents Check that the following items are included in your package. Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4 type) 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) Indoor FM antenna Quick reference card Quick Reference Card AM loop antenna Battery Installation in the Remote Control 2 1 3 1 Turn the remote control over and slide the battery compartment cover in the direction of the arrow. 2 Insert the batteries (AAA, R03 or UM-4 type) according the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Close the battery compartment cover. Connection guide Battery Replacement If the remote control operates only when it is close to the unit, the batteries are weak. Replace all the batteries with new ones. Be sure to replace the batteries within about two minutes. If it takes longer than two minutes, the codes set for the remote control will return to the factory settings. (Refer to pages 45 to 52 about the remote control.) Notes • Use only AAA, R03 or UM-4 batteries for replacement. • Be sure the battery polarity is correct. (See the illustration inside the battery compartment.) • Remove the batteries if the remote control will not be used for an extended period of time. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. 2 0102V596RDS01-08_EN 2 2/29/0, 3:28 PM GETTING STARTED Using the Remote Control Within approximately 6 m (20 feet) INTRODUCTION Remote control sensor The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the infrared sensor during operation. When the sensor is covered or there is a large object between the remote control and the sensor, the sensor cannot receive signals. The sensor may not be able to receive signals properly when it is exposed to direct sunlight or a strong artificial light (such as a fluorescent or strobe light). In this case, change the direction of the light or reposition the unit to avoid direct lighting. Notes Handle the remote control with care. Do not spill water, tea or other liquids on the remote control. Do not drop the remote control. Do not leave or store the remote control in the following conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – extremely low temperature. PREPARATION • • • • BASIC OPERATION ADVANCED OPERATION APPENDIX English 3 0102V596RDS01-08_EN 3 2/29/0, 3:28 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel 1 2 3 – 7 8 90 + – q + 4 L 5 6 R w e rtyuiop a 1 STANDBY/ON Press this switch to turn on the power of this unit or to set this unit in the standby mode. Before turning the power on, set VOLUME to the “m” position. s d f 6 VOLUME Turn this control to turn up or down the volume. 7 PHONES jack This receives signals from the remote control. Connect the headphones to the PHONES jack. You can listen to the sound to be output from the main speakers through the headphones. When listening with headphones privately, set both SPEAKERS A and B to the OFF position, press EFFECT to turn off the effect speakers (center and rear) and set “BASS OUT” on the SET MENU to the MAIN position (so that no DSP program name appears on the display). 3 Display 8 SPEAKERS This shows various information. (Refer to page 6 for details.) Set A or B (or both A and B) to the ON position for the main speaker system (connected to this unit) that you want to use. Set the button(s) to the OFF position for the main speaker system that you don’t want to use. Standby mode In this mode, this unit consumes a very small quantity of power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 Remote control sensor 4 INPUT MODE Press this button to select the input mode among AUTO, DTS and ANALOG for the DVD/LD, TV/digital TV and cable TV/satellite tuner sources. 5 INPUT SELECTOR Turn this selector to select the input source (TUNER, CD, PHONO, CBL/SAT, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV, DVD/LD) that you want to listen to or watch. The arrow for the selected input source indicator lights up on the display. 9 PROGRAM selector Press l or h to select a DSP program when the effect speakers (center and rear) are turned on. The name of the selected program appears on the display. 0 EFFECT Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center and rear). If you turn them off, the signals of the center and rear channels are directed to the right and left main speakers when playing a source encoded with Dolby Digital and DTS. In this case, the output levels of the right and left speakers may not match. 4 0102V596RDS01-08_EN 4 2/29/0, 3:28 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS y PRESET/TUNING, EDIT These controls are only effective for the sound from the main speakers. a) BASS Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the low-frequency response. The “0” position produces a flat response. b) TREBLE Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the high-frequency response. The “0” position produces a flat response. Press this button to turn on or off “ z ” on the display, and switch the function between storing a broadcasting station (preset tuning) and tuning. This button is also used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. w TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER e BALANCE Press this button to switch the reception band between FM and AM. i MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Press this button to store broadcasting stations. Hold down this button for more than three seconds to begin automatic preset tuning. o TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Press this button to switch the tuning mode between automatic and manual. To use the automatic tuning method, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the display. To use the manual tuning method, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off. p RDS MODE/FREQ When an RDS station is received, press this button to change the display mode among the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data services) and/or frequency display mode in turn. r A/B/C/D/E a EON Press this button to select one of a group (A to E) of preset stations. Press this button to select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) when you want to tune in to a radio program of that type automatically. t PRESET/TUNING s PTY SEEK MODE ADVANCED OPERATION When “ z ” appears on the display This button is used to select a preset station number (1 to 8). Press h to select a higher and l to select a lower preset station number. When “ z ” goes off from the display This button is used for tuning. Press h to tune in to higher frequencies, and l to tune in to lower frequencies. When this unit is in the PTY SEEK mode, press this button to select a program type. BASIC OPERATION This control is only effective for the sound from the main speakers. Turn the control to adjust the balance of the output volume from the right and left main speakers to compensate for sound imbalance caused by the speaker location or listening room conditions. u FM/AM PREPARATION Press this button to select a tape or an MD source. The “TAPE/MD MONITOR” indicator lights up on the display. When you press the button again, the “TAPE/MD MONITOR” indicator goes off, “EXT. DECODER” appears on the display and you can listen to a source connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals. INTRODUCTION q Tone controls Press this button to set the unit in the PTY SEEK mode. d PTY SEEK START Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode. f VIDEO AUX terminals APPENDIX Connect an auxiliary audio or video input source such as a camcorder to these terminals. If the connected video unit has an S video output terminal, connect it to the S VIDEO terminal to obtain a high-resolution picture. Use INPUT SELECTOR to select the source connected to these terminals. English 5 0102V596RDS01-08_EN 5 2/29/0, 3:28 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Display 1 t indicator 8 MEMORY indicator The “t” indicator lights up when the built-in DTS decoder is on. This flashes for about five seconds after pressing MEMORY. During this period, the displayed station can be stored in the memory. 2 DSP program indicators The name of the selected DSP program lights up in the following cases: • When the tuner is selected as the input source. • When DSP program No. 2, 3 or the subprogram “ENHANCED” of No. 1 is selected. 9 RDS mode indicators 3 Multi-information display 0 AUTO indicator This display shows various information: for example the name of the selected DSP program and the various settings during adjustment with the SET MENU. The current station frequency and band (FM or AM) also appear when the tuner is selected as the input source. This lights up when the unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 4 Input source indicators One of the arrows for these indicators lights up depending on which source is selected. 5 TAPE/MD MONITOR indicator This lights up when the tape deck or MD recorder, etc. is selected as the input source by pressing TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER (or TAPE/MD). 6 g and o indicators “ g ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital decoder is on. “ o ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on. 7 x indicator “ x ” lights up when the built-in digital sound field processor is on. The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently received RDS station light(s) up. Illumination of the red indicator next to the RDS data name shows that the corresponding RDS mode is now selected. q PTY HOLD indicator This lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK mode. w EON indicator This lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. e Program type name indicators The name of the selected program type lights up when the “EON” indicator lights up. r STEREO indicator This lights up when an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength is being received. t Signal-level indicator This indicates the signal level of the station being received. If multipath interference is detected, the indication decreases. y SLEEP indicator This lights up while the built-in SLEEP timer is on. 6 0102V596RDS01-08_EN 6 2/29/0, 3:28 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote Control 1 DSP Press this button to switch the function of the numeric buttons to the DSP program selector. (Refer to page 8.) INTRODUCTION This section describes the basic operation of this unit with the remote control. First, set the selector dial to the AMP/ TUN position. Refer to “PRESET REMOTE CONTROL” on page 45 for full details. 2 Indicator window This displays the name of components which can be controlled. 8 9 1 2 3 Numeric buttons (Input selector buttons) 0 3 EFFECT Refer to page 8 for details. BASIC OPERATION q Refer to page 8. PREPARATION Select the AMP/TUN position. These buttons select the input source. CD: To play a CD TUNER: To listen to an FM (RDS) or AM broadcast TAPE/MD: To play a tape or MD DVD/LD: To play a DVD or LD D-TV: To watch a TV VCR: To play a video cassette PHONO: To play an analog record CBL/SAT: To watch cable TV or satellite broadcast V-AUX: To use a camcorder EXT. DEC.: To play another multi-channel source 4 TEST Press this button to output the test tone for each speaker. 4 5 j (left), i (right) w 5 These buttons adjust the settings of the SET MENU and TIME/LEVEL mode. 6 TIME/LEVEL e TV POWER r TV VOLUME 7 Press this button to select the items in the TIME/LEVEL mode. ADVANCED OPERATION 6 7 SLEEP Press this button to set the SLEEP timer. t 8 INPUT y Press this button to switch the function of the numeric buttons to the input selector. (Refer to page 8.) TV INPUT u 9 Indicator This flashes in red when pressing a button on the remote control. Turn this dial to select the position for the component to be controlled. (The proper code must be set for your component. Refer to “Setup codes” on page 51.) When the position is selected, the remote control is set to that component operation mode. APPENDIX 0 Selector dial English 7 0102V596RDS01-08_EN 7 2/29/0, 3:28 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS q A/B/C/D/E, PRESET +/– These buttons are used to select a preset station. A/B/C/D/E: To select one of a group (A to E) of preset stations PRESET +/–: To select a preset station number (1 to 8) ■ When selecting a DSP program and turning on or off the effect speakers (center and rear) B A w d (next), u (back) These buttons are used to advance or go back one selection on the SET MENU and TIME/LEVEL mode. e SET MENU Press this button to select the items on the SET MENU. r POWER Press this button to turn this unit on. t STANDBY A 1 Press DSP regardless of the position of the selector dial. The indicator lights up for about three seconds. 2 You can select a DSP program with the numeric buttons (1 to 8) and turn on or off the effect speakers (center and rear) by pressing EFFECT while the indicator is lit. Press this button to set this unit in the standby mode. y VOLUME (+/–) These buttons are used to adjust the volume level. u MUTE Press this button to mute the sound. To cancel mute, press this button again. EFFECT Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center and rear) in the following cases: • When the selector dial is set to the DSP/TUN position. • While the indicator is lit for about three seconds after pressing DSP. Description of the Numeric Buttons B 1 2 Set the selector dial to the DSP/TUN position. You can select a DSP program directly with the numeric buttons (1 to 8) and turn on or off the effect speakers (center and rear) by pressing EFFECT. ■ When selecting a preset station number The Numeric buttons function in various ways depending on the position of the selector dial or the combination of other instructions. ■ When selecting an input source 1 2 Press INPUT regardless of the position of the selector dial. The indicator lights up for about three seconds. 1 Set code number “0023” in the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. Refer to page 51 for setting the code. 2 Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN (or DSP/ TUN) position. 3 You can select a preset station number directly with the numeric buttons (1 to 8). Refer to page 29. You can select an input source with the numeric buttons while the indicator is lit. 8 0102V596RDS01-08_EN 8 2/29/0, 3:28 PM PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP This unit is designed to provide the best sound-field quality with a 5-speaker system, using main speakers, rear speakers and a center speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacture or speakers with the same tonal quality. ■ Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field Subwoofer Main speaker (L) 1.8 m Center speaker Rear speaker (L) ■ Main speakers Place the right and left main speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the TV monitor should be the same. ■ Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet) above the floor. ■ Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your TV monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the monitor and centrally between the main speakers. Note • If the center speaker is not used, the center channel sound will be heard from the right and left main speakers. In that case, “CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to the NONE position. (Refer to page 39 for details.) ADVANCED OPERATION It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when playing back a source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. Rear speaker (R) BASIC OPERATION The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use highperformance models that can reproduce sounds over the full range for the center speaker and the rear speakers. Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. Main speaker (R) PREPARATION The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Speaker Placement INTRODUCTION Speakers to Be Used ■ Subwoofer APPENDIX The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall reflections. CAUTION English Some types of speakers interfere with a TV monitor. If this problem occurs, move the speakers away from the monitor. If you cannot avoid installing the center speaker or subwoofer near the TV monitor, use magnetically shielded speakers. 9 0103V596RDS09-20_EN 9 2/29/0, 3:28 PM CONNECTIONS Before Connecting Components CAUTION Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been completed. Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different terminal names. Refer to the instructions for each component to be connected to this unit. When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect it to the terminals with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this labeling system to all its products. Use RCA-type pin plug cables for connecting audio/video components with the exception described later. The input and output terminals for pin plugs can be distinguished as follows: Yellow video signals (composite) V V White analog audio signals for the left channel L L Red analog audio signals for the right channel R R coaxial digital signals C C After completing all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct. Connecting the Antenna Connecting to an External (pages 11 and 12) Decoder (page 15) Connecting the Speakers (pages 16 and 17) Connecting the Power Supply Cords (page 18) (Europe model) A B Connecting an Audio Component (page 13) Connecting a Video Component (pages 14 and 15) IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch (page 18) 10 0103V596RDS09-20_EN 10 2/29/0, 3:28 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting the Antennas Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. ■ Indoor FM antenna (included) Firmly insert the connector into the FM ANT terminal. The indoor FM antenna is only a simple antenna. For reception with better sound quality, installing the outdoor FM antenna (commercially available) is recommended. Indoor FM antenna ■ Outdoor FM antenna 75-ohm coaxial cable 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (included for U.K. model) 2 1 11 (7/16) 8 (5/16) 6 (1/14) Cover 3 Unit: mm (inch) 1 Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/ 300-ohm antenna adapter. 2 Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. 3 4 Cut the lead wire and remove it. 5 Snap the cover into place. Lead wire Clamp with pliers. APPENDIX 4 Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Connecting a coaxial cable to the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) BASIC OPERATION You may be unable to obtain good FM radio reception depending on your local conditions (distance from the broadcasting station, interposing buildings and mountains, etc.). Consult your dealer or authorized service center and be sure to install an antenna that suits your local conditions. Install the outdoor FM antenna (commercially available) in a high place as far away from any roads as possible to avoid being affected by automobile ignition noise. 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (included for U.K. model) PREPARATION Note • Do not connect an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM antenna at the same time. INTRODUCTION Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. However, a properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. 5 Clamp with pliers. Insert the wire into the slot. English 11 0103V596RDS09-20_EN 11 2/29/0, 3:28 PM CONNECTIONS ■ AM loop antenna (included) AM loop antenna The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and attached to a wall, etc. However, note that the reception sensitivity may deteriorate if the antenna is attached to a metal or steel reinforced wall. Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 2 1 3 4 1 2 Press the tab and unlock the terminal hole. 3 Return the tab to its original position to lock the lead wires. Lightly pull the lead wires to confirm a good connection. 4 5 Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand. 5 Antenna stand Insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best reception is obtained. ■ Outdoor AM antenna Vinyl covered wire (5 m to 10 m) If you cannot obtain good reception with the AM loop antenna, connect 5 m to 10 m of vinyl covered wire to the AM ANT terminal and extend it outdoors from a window. ■ Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. 12 0103V596RDS09-20_EN 12 2/29/0, 3:28 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting an Audio Component Turntable L INTRODUCTION OUTPUT GND R (Europe model) PREPARATION L Analog signal R L R CD player R LINE OUT L R LINE IN Signal flow Tape deck or MD recorder Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L), input (IN) and output (OUT) properly. ■ PHONO terminals y Connecting the ground (earth) wire of the turntable to the GND terminal will normally minimize hum, but in some cases, better results may be obtained with the ground wire disconnected. ADVANCED OPERATION These terminals are used to connect a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an inline boosting transformer or MC head amplifier when connecting to these terminals. BASIC OPERATION OUTPUT L APPENDIX English 13 0103V596RDS09-20_EN 13 2/29/0, 3:28 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting a Video Component TV monitor DVD/LD player S VIDEO OUT S VIDEO ANALOG IN AUDIO OUT L R COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT C S Cable TV/satellite tuner OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT C O S VIDEO OUT L O S L S R L AUDIO OUT R S VIDEO OUT S Video signal S VIDEO IN O S ANALOG AUDIO OUT S VIDEO OUT VCR O R Analog signal S R S AUDIO IN L R S L (Europe model) ANALOG AUDIO OUT C Digital signal (optical) Digital signal (coaxial) Signal flow OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT TV/digital TV ■ Audio signal terminals Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L), input (IN) and output (OUT) properly. ■ S Video signal terminals Use a special S VIDEO cable (commercially available) for the S VIDEO connection. ■ Digital audio signal terminals If your DVD/LD player, TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner, etc. has coaxial or optical digital signal output terminals, they can be connected to this unit’s COAXIAL and/or OPTICAL digital signal input terminals. To make a connection between the optical digital signal terminals, remove the cover from each terminal, and then connect them by using a commercially available optical fiber cable that conforms to EIA standards. Other cables might not function correctly. Notes • Be sure to attach the covers when the OPTICAL terminals are not being used in order to protect them from dust. • If your LD player has a Dolby Digital RF signal output terminal, be sure to use the RF demodulator (separately purchased). • No sound will be heard when connecting your LD player’s Dolby Digital RF signal output terminal directly to this unit’s COAXIAL DVD/LD digital signal input terminal. y • The input signal from the DVD/LD or CBL/SAT input terminals is selected in the following order of priority with the input mode set to AUTO: COAXIAL terminal → OPTICAL terminal → Analog terminal. Refer to page 23 for details. • All digital signal input terminals are applicable to sampling frequencies of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz and 96 kHz. (Refer to page 24 about 96-kHz sampling 24-bit digital signals.) When making connections between the digital signal terminals, you should connect the components to the samenamed analog audio signal terminals of this unit, because a digital signal cannot be recorded by a tape deck, MD recorder or VCR connected to this unit. 14 0103V596RDS09-20_EN 14 2/29/0, 3:28 PM CONNECTIONS ■ VIDEO terminals (composite) DVD/LD player Cable TV/satellite tuner VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT Note V • If video signals are input from both the S VIDEO input and composite input terminals, the signals will be directed to their respective output terminals. No connection L INTRODUCTION V If your video components do not have “S” video terminals, they can be connected to this unit’s VIDEO terminals. Be sure to connect the input (IN) and output (OUT) properly. V R V V VIDEO IN TV monitor V VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT TV/digital TV VCR VIDEO IN PREPARATION SCARTplug V Video signal V Signal flow Make a connection as shown above with a commercially available SCART-plug connector cable. ■ VIDEO AUX terminals (on the front panel) These terminals are used to connect any video input source such as a camcorder to this unit. S V L R BASIC OPERATION ■ TV monitor with a 21-pin connector AUDIO OUT R AUDIO OUT L S VIDEO OUT Connecting to an External Decoder External decoder SURROUND MAIN OUT OUT L R L CENTER OUT SUBWOOFER OUT R (Europe model) This unit has additional 6-channel audio signal input terminals for connecting an external decoder to this unit. Connect the 6-channel audio signal output terminals of the decoder to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit. 0103V596RDS09-20_EN 15 2/29/0, 3:29 PM English 15 APPENDIX Notes • When a source connected to these terminals is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. • The settings of “CENTER SP”, “REAR SP”, “MAIN SP” and “BASS OUT” on the SET MENU have no effect on a source connected to these terminals. The setting of “MAIN LVL” is effective. (Refer to pages 39 and 40 for details.) • Adjustment of the output level of the center speaker, rear speakers and subwoofer is effective when a source connected to these terminals is selected as the input source. (Refer to page 42 for details.) ADVANCED OPERATION Camcorder VIDEO OUT CONNECTIONS Connecting the Speakers Main speakers A Main speakers B Right Left Right Left (Europe model) Subwoofer connection When using a subwoofer with builtin amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input terminal of the subwoofer system to the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal of this unit. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this terminal. (The cut-off frequency of this terminals is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this terminal. L R Right Subwoofer system Center speaker Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTIONS Left Rear speakers ■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the SPEAKERS A or B terminals. ■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage the unit and/or speakers. ■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. 16 0103V596RDS09-20_EN 16 2/29/0, 3:29 PM CONNECTIONS ■ Speaker cables Remove approx. 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 1 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 2 ■ Connecting to the MAIN SPEAKERS terminals Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 1 2 Unscrew the knob. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. PREPARATION 3 1 2 ■ Connecting to the REAR and CENTER SPEAKERS terminals Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 1 3 1 2 Open the tab. 3 Return the tab to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole of each terminal. BASIC OPERATION 2 ■ Connecting to an external amplifier Note • Output signals from these terminals are affected by the use of VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE. 1 MAIN OUTPUT terminals (Europe model) These terminals are for the main channel line output. Connect the input terminals of the external amplifier to these terminals. ADVANCED OPERATION The speaker connections described on page 16 are fine for most applications. If you wish to drive your existing amplifier, the following terminals are available for connecting an external amplifier(s) to this unit. 1 INTRODUCTION 1 10 mm (3/8”) 2 CENTER OUTPUT terminals APPENDIX These terminals are for the center channel line output. Connect the input terminals of the external amplifier to these terminals. 3 REAR (SURROUND) OUTPUT terminals These terminals are for the rear channel line output. Connect the input terminals of the external amplifier to these terminals. Note 3 • If an external amplifier is connected to the MAIN, CENTER or REAR OUTPUT terminals, disconnect the corresponding speakers (main, center or rear) from the SPEAKERS terminals. 17 0103V596RDS09-20_EN 17 2/29/0, 3:29 PM English 2 CONNECTIONS IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise the unit may be damaged. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slide to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby mode. Select the right or left position according to the impedance of speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in the standby mode. (Europe model) If you use IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Main speakers left position right position If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher. Rear speakers The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Center speaker The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. Connecting the Power Supply Cords After completing all connections, connect the AC power cord to an AC power outlet. Disconnect the AC power cord if you will not use this unit for a long period of time. ■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED) Europe model .................................................... 2 OUTLETS U.K. model .......................................................... 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 100 W. (Europe model) To AC outlet SWITCHED 18 0103V596RDS09-20_EN 18 2/29/0, 3:29 PM ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE Using the Test Tone The adjustment of each speaker sound output level should be performed at your listening position with the remote control. After completing the adjustments, use VOLUME (+/–) at your listening position to check if the adjustments are satisfactory. 2,7 1 Before You Start Adjusting 6 5 1 PREPARATION 2 3 – + – + L R Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. 1 Set VOLUME to the “m” position. 2 Press TEST. “TEST LEFT” appears on the display. 2 Turn the power on. 3 Turn up the volume. You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from each speaker for about two seconds in the following order: left main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker and left rear speaker. The display changes as shown below. Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you use two main speaker systems, press both A and B. 4 Set BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE to the “0” position. TEST LEFT TEST RIGHT ADVANCED OPERATION 3 BASIC OPERATION 1 4 3 INTRODUCTION This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level balance between the main, center and rear speakers by using the built-in test tone generator. When this adjustment is performed, the sound output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder and DTS decoder. TEST CENTER – + – + L R APPENDIX TEST L SUR. TEST R SUR. Notes 19 0103V596RDS09-20_EN 19 2/29/0, 3:29 PM English • If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set the unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections. • If the test tone cannot be heard from the center speaker, check the setting of “CENTER SP” on the SET MENU. ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE 4 5 Adjust BALANCE on the front panel so that the sound output level of the right main speaker and the left main speaker is the same. 7 L R Front panel Press TIME/LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker to be adjusted. “CENTER”, “R SUR.” or “L SUR.” appears on the display. y After pressing TIME/LEVEL once, you can also select the item by pressing d. (Pressing u changes the selection in the reverse order.) 6 When the adjustment is complete, press TEST. “TEST OFF” appears on the display and the test tone stops. Note • If “CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to the NONE position, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted in step 6. The center channel sound is automatically output from the right and left main speakers. y • Once you have completed the adjustments, you can only adjust the overall volume level of your audio system by using VOLUME (or VOLUME (+/–)). • If you use external amplifiers, you may also use their volume controls to achieve the proper balance. • If there is insufficient sound output from the center and rear speakers, you may decrease the main speaker output level by setting “MAIN LVL” on the SET MENU to “–10 dB”. (Refer to page 40 for details.) Press i to raise and j to lower the level. Adjust the sound output levels of the center speaker and the rear speakers so that they become almost the same as that of the main speakers. While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. Note • You cannot adjust the delay time while the test tone is being heard even if “DELAY” appears on the display. 20 0103V596RDS09-20_EN 20 2/29/0, 3:29 PM BASIC OPERATION PLAYING A SOURCE 4 4 2 – + – + L 1,6 R Front panel or PREPARATION Select the desired input source with INPUT SELECTOR (or the input selector buttons). (Turn on the TV monitor for video sources.) The name of the selected input source appears for a moment and the arrow for the selected input source indicator lights up on the display. INTRODUCTION When using the remote control, set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN position. Remote control 3 7 6 7 Input source a. b. 1 Notes Front panel 2 Turn the power on. or Front panel 3 Remote control Front panel For the DVD/LD, TV/digital TV and cable TV/satellite tuner sources, the current input mode is also shown. Refer to page 23 for details about the input mode. 21 0104V596RDS21-26_EN 21 2/29/0, 3:29 PM English y APPENDIX Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you use two main speaker systems, press both A and B. • If the “TAPE/MD MONITOR” indicator lights up or “EXT. DECODER” is shown on the display, no other audio source except a tape/MD source and a source connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals can be played. To select another input source with INPUT SELECTOR (or the input selector buttons): – Press TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER twice (or TAPE/MD once) to turn off the “TAPE/MD MONITOR” indicator. – Press TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER once (or EXT. DEC.) to turn off “EXT. DECODER”. • If you select and play a video source when the “TAPE/MD MONITOR” indicator lights up, the play back result will be a video image from the video source and the sound from the audio source connected to the TAPE/MD IN (PLAY) terminals. • A video source cannot be selected when “EXT. DECODER” is shown on the display. If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals together with a video source, first select the video source and then select the source connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals. ADVANCED OPERATION Set VOLUME to the “m” position. BASIC OPERATION 2 6 4 To select a tape or an MD source Press TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER (or TAPE/MD) so Front panel that the “TAPE/MD MONITOR” indicator lights up on the display. To select a source connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals Press TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER repeatedly (or EXT. DEC.) until “EXT. DECODER” appears on the display. PLAYING A SOURCE 5 Play the source. Refer to the instructions for the source component (and page 27 for details about tuning). Note • When controlling an audio/video component (tape deck, MD recorder, CD player, DVD/LD player, etc.) with the remote control, set the selector dial to the appropriate position (TAPE/ MD, CD, DVD/LD, etc.), corresponding to the component you want to control. Refer to “PRESET REMOTE CONTROL” on page 45. 6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. If desired, adjust BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, etc. These controls are only effective for sound from the main speakers. • BASS controls the low-frequency response. • TREBLE controls the high-frequency response. • BALANCE adjusts the balance of the output volume from the right and left main speakers. or Front panel – Remote control + – + L ■ To mute the sound Press MUTE on the remote control. To cancel mute, press MUTE. Note • During muting, “MUTE ON” appears on the display. ■ When you have finished using this unit Press STANDBY/ON (or STANDBY) to set this unit in the standby mode. ■ BGV (background video) function The BGV function allows you to combine a video image from a video source with a sound from an audio source. (For example, you can listen to classical music while you are watching a video.) This function can only be controlled with the remote control. Play a video source, and then select an audio source with the input selector buttons on the remote control. The BGV function does not work if you select the audio source with INPUT SELECTOR on the front panel. R Front panel 7 Use the digital sound field processor. Refer to page 25. or Front panel Remote control 22 0104V596RDS21-26_EN 22 2/29/0, 3:29 PM PLAYING A SOURCE Input Mode (for the DVD/LD, TV/ digital TV and cable TV/satellite tuner sources) Press INPUT MODE (or the input selector button that you have pressed to select the input source on the remote control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the display. or When you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode for the DVD/LD source is always set to AUTO and for TV/ digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner source is set according to “TV INPUT” and “CBL INPUT” on the SET MENU. (Refer to page 41 for details.) Front panel Remote control PREPARATION ■ AUTO In this mode, the input signal is selected in the following order of priority: 1. Digital signal encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS 2. Normal digital signal (PCM) 3. Analog signal (ANALOG) Note ■ DTS In this mode, only a digital signal encoded with DTS is selected, even if other signals are being input at the same time. In this mode, only an analog signal is selected, even if a digital signal is being input at the same time. Select this mode when you want to use an analog signal instead of a digital signal. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ ANALOG Notes • Set the input mode to AUTO to play a DVD/LD source encoded with Dolby Digital. • The sound output may be interrupted for some LD and DVD players in the following situation: The input mode is set to AUTO. A search is performed while playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, and then disc playing is restored. The sound output is interrupted for a moment because the digital signal was selected again. • The input mode cannot be changed for the CD, TUNER, TAPE/ MD, VCR, PHONO and VIDEO AUX sources because only analog signals are used for these. • The current input mode appears on the display when the DVD/ LD, TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner source is selected, or the input mode is changed. BASIC OPERATION • If digital signals are input from both the OPTICAL and COAXIAL terminals, the digital signal from the COAXIAL terminal is selected. INTRODUCTION This unit allows you to switch the input mode for sources that send both digital and analog signals to this unit. The AUTO, DTS and ANALOG input modes are provided. ■ Switching the input mode APPENDIX English 23 0104V596RDS21-26_EN 23 2/29/0, 3:29 PM PLAYING A SOURCE ■ Notes on playing a source encoded with DTS • If “DATA ERROR” appears on the display while playing an LD source encoded with DTS, stop playback and turn the player off and then on again. • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play an LD source encoded with DTS and set the input mode to ANALOG, there will be the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the source to the digital input terminal and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound. • If you play a source encoded with DTS and set the input mode to AUTO, there will be a short noise at first while the unit recognizes the DTS signal and turns on the DTS decoder. This is not a malfunction, and can be avoided by setting the input mode to DTS beforehand. In addition, if you continue to play a source encoded with DTS with the input mode setting left to AUTO, this unit automatically switches to the “DTS-decoding” mode to prevent noise from being generated during subsequent operation. (The “t” indicator lights up on the display.) The “t” indicator will flash immediately after playback of a source encoded with DTS has finished. Only a source encoded with DTS can be played back while this indicator is flashing. If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO. ■ Notes on playing an LD source • Some audio/video components, such as an LD player, output different audio signals through their analog and digital terminals. Change the input mode as necessary. • If the input mode is set to AUTO for the LD source, this unit automatically determines which type of signal the LD source contains. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting and reproduces 5.1 channel sound. • If the LD player is transmitting signals by a non-normal method, this unit cannot detect the Dolby Digital or DTS signal. In this case, the decoder automatically switches to PCM or analog. • If the LD source does not contain a digital soundtrack, connect the LD player to the analog terminals and set the input mode to AUTO or ANALOG. • While you are operating the LD player and playing a disc encoded with Dolby Digital, if you switch from the pause or chapter forwarding function to normal playback, you may hear the PCM or analog sound an instant before the Dolby Digital sound is played. ■ Notes on the digital signal The digital input terminal of this unit can also handle 96-kHz sampling 24-bit digital signals. (To utilize this, use a source that supports 96-kHz sampling 24-bit digital signals and set the player for digital output. Refer to the instructions for the player.) Note the following when a 96-kHz sampling 24-bit digital signal is input to this unit. 1. The following indicator will appear on the display. 2. DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output as normal 2-channel stereo sound using only the right and left main speakers. 3. Delay time and speaker output level cannot be adjusted. 24 0104V596RDS21-26_EN 24 9/29/0, 10:07 AM DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP) EFFECT You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. Refer to pages 35 to 37 for details about each program. – + – + L ■ On the remote control Make sure that the effect speakers (center and rear) and subwoofer are turned on. 2 Press DSP. The indicator lights up for about three seconds. 3 Use the numeric buttons (1 to 8) to select the desired program before the indicator goes off. The name of the selected program appears on the display. R 2 PREPARATION 1 INTRODUCTION Selecting a DSP Program 2 DSP program name If the selector dial is set to the DSP/TUN position, you can select a DSP program directly with the numeric buttons. y If desired, adjust the delay time and the sound output level of each speaker. (Refer to pages 42 and 43 for details.) ■ On the front panel Make sure that the effect speakers (center and rear) and subwoofer are turned on. 2 Press PROGRAM h or l repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears on the display. DSP program name APPENDIX • You can select a DSP program for each of the input sources. Once you select a program, it is linked with the input source selected at that time. So, when you select the input source next time, the same program is automatically selected. • When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/ Normal or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED, no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. However, if “CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to the NONE position, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers. • When a source connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. • When high-rate 96-kHz sampling 24-bit digital signals are input to this unit, no DSP program can be selected and the sound is only output from right and left main speakers as a normal 2-channel stereo sound. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 Notes BASIC OPERATION 3 English 25 0104V596RDS21-26_EN 25 2/29/0, 3:29 PM DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP) EFFECT Canceling the Sound Effect (turning off the effect speakers) Press EFFECT to cancel the sound effect and monitor only the main sound. Press EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back on. Front panel or Remote control y If the selector dial is set to a position other than the DSP/TUN position, first press DSP and then EFFECT on the remote control. Notes • If you turn off the sound effect when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoding, the sounds of the center and rear channels are mixed and output from the main speakers. • If you turn off the sound effect when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoding, it may happen that the sound is output faintly or not output normally, depending on the source. In this case, turn sound effect back on. 26 0104V596RDS21-26_EN 26 2/29/0, 3:29 PM TUNING 5 1 Press PRESET/TUNING h once to tune in to a higher frequency or l once to tune in to a lower frequency. Press the button again if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station. INTRODUCTION Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. However, if the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually (manual tuning). y + – + L R 5 42 3 Manual Tuning Automatic Tuning Use INPUT SELECTOR to select the tuner as the input source. 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM or AM). “FM” or “AM” appears on the display. 1 Use INPUT SELECTOR to select the tuner as the input source. 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM or AM). “FM” or “AM” appears on the display. or or 3 Press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the display. Press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off. Goes off Lights up 4 4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn “ z ” off. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn “ z ” off. ADVANCED OPERATION 3 BASIC OPERATION 1 PREPARATION – • Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station (because the signal from the station is weak). • When tuned in to a station, the frequency of the received station is shown on the display. If an RDS station that offers the PS data service is being received, the station name is shown instead of the frequency on the display. Turn “ z ” off 5 Turn “ z ” off Note APPENDIX Press PRESET/TUNING h or l to tune in to the desired station. To continue the tuning search, hold down the button. • If you tune in manually to an FM station, it will be automatically received in monaural mode to increase the signal quality. English 27 0105V596RDS27-30_EN 27 2/29/0, 3:29 PM TUNING Automatic Preset Tuning (for RDS stations only) You can make use of the automatic preset tuning function for RDS stations only. This function enables the unit to automatically tune in with strong signals and to sequentially store up to 40 RDS stations (5 groups x 8 stations). (Refer to pages 31 to 33 for details on RDS stations.) – + – + L 2 Press FM/AM to select the FM band. Press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the display. Lights up 3 You can select the preset number from which the unit will store RDS stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Before automatic preset tuning begins (after pressing MEMORY in step 3): 1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING h or l to select the preset number with which the first station will be stored. The automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn “ z ” off and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. ■ When automatic preset tuning is completed R 13 2 1 ■ Automatic preset tuning options Hold down MEMORY for about three seconds. The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. After about five seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed toward the higher frequencies. The display shows the frequency of the last preset station. Check the contents and the number of preset stations by following the procedure in the section “To Recall a Preset Station” on page 29. Notes • A new setting can be stored in place of the former one. • You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM station by simply using the manual preset tuning method. • Automatic preset tuning will be performed for all RDS network stations until all have been stored up to E8. Even if the number of received stations is not enough to be stored up to E8, automatic preset tuning is automatically ended after searching for all stations. • Only RDS stations with sufficient signal strength are stored by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in monaural mode and store it by using the manual preset tuning method. (There may be a case that this unit cannot receive a station which could be received by using the automatic tuning method. This is because this unit receives a large amount of PI (Program Identification) data along with the station.) Flashes Received stations are sequentially stored as A1, A2 ... A8. If more than 8 stations have been tuned, they are stored as preset station numbers in other groups (B, C, D and E) in that order. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode. If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week, the memory will be erased. If so, store the stations again by using preset tuning methods. 28 0105V596RDS27-30_EN 28 2/29/0, 3:29 PM TUNING Manual Preset Tuning To Recall a Preset Station You can also store up to 40 stations (5 groups x 8 stations) manually. You can recall any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number with which it was stored. – + – + L R 3 4 2,5 – Tune in to the desired station. Refer to page 27 for the tuning procedure. 2 Press MEMORY. The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about five seconds. + – + L R 1 PREPARATION 1 2 5 1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the required group of preset stations. Make sure that “ z ” appears on the display. or Front panel 2 Press MEMORY before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off. The displayed station has been stored as the preset group and number you have selected, and the reception band and frequency appear on the display. Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING h or l (or PRESET +/–) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the display along with the reception band, frequency and signal strength information. or Front panel APPENDIX 6 Press PRESET/TUNING h or l to select a preset station number (1 to 8) with which you want to store the station before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off. Press h to select a higher preset station number and l to select a lower preset station number. 1 2 ADVANCED OPERATION 4 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select the desired group (A to E) of preset stations before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off. Make sure that “ z ” appears on the display. The selected group appears on the display. BASIC OPERATION Flashes 3 INTRODUCTION You can also recall a preset station with the remote control. Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN position and press TUNER (number 2) to select the tuner as the input source. Remote control Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. y • A new setting can be stored in place of the former one. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. You can select the preset station number with the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control if code number “0023” has been set in the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. 29 0105V596RDS27-30_EN 29 2/29/0, 3:29 PM English Notes TUNING Exchanging Preset Stations You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. ■ Example: If you want to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5” 2,4 – + – + L R 1 Recall preset station “E1”. Refer to the procedure in the section “To Recall a Preset Station” on page 29. 2 Hold down (PRESET/TUNING) EDIT for about three second. “E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash. Flashes 3 Recall preset station “A5” by using the buttons on the front panel. “A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash. Flashes 4 Press (PRESET/TUNING) EDIT again. The display shows the exchange of stations has been completed. 30 0105V596RDS27-30_EN 30 2/29/0, 3:29 PM RECEIVING RDS STATIONS RDS data contains various information such as PI (Program Identification), PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio Text), CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced Other Networks), etc. The RDS function is carried out among the network stations. This unit can receive PI, PS, PTY, RT, CT, and EON data when receiving RDS broadcasting stations. ■ PS (Program Service name) mode: The name of the RDS station being received is displayed. The program type on the RDS station being received is displayed. There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations. You can make this unit search for a station which is broadcasting a program of the desired type. Refer to page 32 for details. ■ RT (Radio Text) mode: • When an RDS station is being received, do not press RDS MODE/FREQ until one or more RDS mode indicators light up on the display. If you press the button before the indicators light up on the display, the mode cannot be changed. This is because the unit has not yet received all of the RDS data on the station. • RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected. • The RDS data service cannot be utilized by this unit if the received signal is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode requires a large amount of data to be received, so it is possible that the RT mode may not be displayed even if other RDS modes (PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed. • RDS data cannot sometimes be receive under poor reception conditions. If so, press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from the display. Although the reception mode is changed to monaural by this operation, when you change the display to RDS mode, RDS data may be displayed. • If the signal strength is weakened by external interference during the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service may be cut off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear on the display. PS mode ■ CT (Clock Time) mode: PTY mode The current time is displayed and updated every minute. If the data are accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may appear. ■ EON (Enhanced Other Networks): ADVANCED OPERATION Information about the program (such as the title of the song, name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being received is displayed by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. If other characters are used for RT data, they are displayed with under-bars. Notes BASIC OPERATION ■ PTY (Program Type) mode: The four modes are available in this unit for displaying RDS data. When an RDS station is being received, PS, PTY, RT and/or CT mode indicators that correspond to the RDS data services offered by the station light up on the display. Press RDS MODE/FREQ repeatedly to change the display mode among the RDS data offered by the transmitting station in the order shown below. Illumination of the red indicator next to the RDS mode indicator shows that the corresponding RDS mode is now selected. PREPARATION Description of RDS Data Changing the RDS Mode INTRODUCTION RDS (Radio Data System) is a data transmission system by FM stations in many countries. Stations using this system transmit an inaudible stream of data in addition to the normal radio signal. RT mode Refer to page 33. APPENDIX CT mode Frequency display mode English 31 0106V596RDS31-34_EN 31 2/29/0, 3:29 PM RECEIVING RDS STATIONS ■ To cancel this function PTY SEEK Function Press PTY SEEK MODE twice. If you select the desired program type, the unit automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are broadcasting a program of the required type. – + – + L R 2 1 1 3 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set the unit in the PTY SEEK mode. The program type of the station being received or “NEWS” flashes on the display. ■ Program types in the PTY mode There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations. NEWS AFFAIRS INFO SPORT EDUCATE DRAMA CULTURE SCIENCE VARIED POP M ROCK M M.O.R. M LIGHT M CLASSICS OTHER M News Current affairs General information Sports Education Drama Culture Science Light entertainment Pops Rock Middle-of-the-road music (easy-listening) Light classics Serious classics Other music Flashes 2 Press PRESET/TUNING h or l to select the desired program type. The selected program type appears on the display. 3 Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching all preset RDS stations. The selected program type flashes and the “PTY HOLD” indicator lights up on the display while searching for stations. Light up The selected program type flashes. • If a station that is broadcasting a program of the required type is found, the unit stops at that station. • If the called station is not the desired one, press PTY SEEK START again. The unit begins searching for another station that is broadcasting a program of the same type. 32 0106V596RDS31-34_EN 32 9/29/0, 10:08 AM RECEIVING RDS STATIONS 2 EON Function Note • This function can only be used when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. When such a station is being received, the “EON” indicator lights up on the display. Lights up + – + L PREPARATION • If a preset RDS station of the selected program type starts broadcasting, the unit will automatically switch from the program being currently received to that program. The program type name indicator flashes. – INTRODUCTION This function uses the EON data service on the RDS station network. If you simply select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), the unit automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are scheduled to broadcast a program of the required type and switches from the station being currently received to the new station when the broadcasts starts. Press EON repeatedly to select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT). The selected program type name indicator lights up on the display. R Flashes 1 Make sure that the “EON” indicator lights up on the display. If the “EON” indicator does not light up, tune in to another RDS station so that the “EON” indicator lights up. • When broadcasting of the required program ends, the previously received station (or another program on the same station) is recalled. BASIC OPERATION 2 ■ To cancel this function Lights up ADVANCED OPERATION Press EON repeatedly until no program type name lights up on the display. APPENDIX English 33 0106V596RDS31-34_EN 33 2/29/0, 3:30 PM RECORDING A SOURCE ON TAPE, MD OR VIDEO CASSETTE Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the tape deck, MD recorder or VCR. Refer to the instructions for these components. 2 1,4 y If a tape deck or MD recorder is being used for recording, you can monitor the sounds being recorded by pressing TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER (or TAPE/MD). Notes – + – + L R 2 4 • The DSP program and the setting of VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE have no effect on the material being recorded. • Composite video and S video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S video (or only a composite video) signal by your VCR. • A source connected to this unit only through the digital terminals cannot be recorded by the tape deck, MD recorder or VCR connected to this unit. • A source connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit cannot be recorded. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. 1 Set VOLUME to the “m” position. Front panel 2 Select the source you want to record. or Front panel Remote control 3 Begin recording by the tape deck, MD recorder or VCR connected to this unit. 4 Play the source and then turn up the volume to confirm the input source. or Front panel Remote control 34 0106V596RDS31-34_EN 34 2/29/0, 3:30 PM ADVANCED OPERATION SOUND FIELD PROGRAM When you select a CINEMA DSP program, one of the built-in decoders (Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS) is turned on according to which type of signals the source being played contains. INTRODUCTION This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor (DSP). This processor allows you to electronically expand and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a theaterlike experience in your listening room. You can create outstanding audio sound by selecting a suitable DSP program (this will, of course, depend on what you are listening to). The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital re-creations of actual acoustic environments. ■ For movie or audio/video sources (Program No. 1 to No. 5: CINEMA DSP programs) No. 1 PROGRAM [1] PRO LOGIC/Normal ( o ) • Input source: [4] PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED (ox) • Input source: This program ideally simulates the multisurround speaker systems of the 35 mm-film movie theater. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing are precisely performed without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effect produced by the sound field folds around the viewer naturally from the rear to the right and left, and toward the screen. APPENDIX Dolby Surround 2-ch Dolby Digital • Output channel: 4 channels • DSP: 1 (surround) [5] DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED (gx) • Input source: Dolby Digital • Output channel: 5.1 channels • DSP: 2 (surround L, R) [6] DTS DGTL SUR/ENHANCED (tx) • Input source: DTS • Output channel: 5.1 channels • DSP: 2 (surround L, R) The built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder or DTS decoder precisely reproduces the sound and effect of a source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. The realization of a highly efficient decoding process improves cross talk and channel separation, and makes sound positioning smoother and more precise. In this program, the digital sound field processor is not turned on. ADVANCED OPERATION Dolby Surround 2-ch Dolby Digital • Output channel: 4 channels • DSP: — [2] DOLBY DIGITAL/Normal ( g ) • Input source: Dolby Digital • Output channel: 5.1 channels • DSP: — [3] DTS DGTL SUR/Normal ( t ) • Input source: DTS • Output channel: 5.1 channels • DSP: — FEATURES BASIC OPERATION q/DTS SURROUND SUBPROGRAM PREPARATION • The input source given in the following table for programs 4 through 8 indicates that input source which each program is best suited for. • Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below. English 35 0107V596RDS35-37_EN 35 2/29/0, 3:30 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM No. 2 PROGRAM MOVIE THEATER 1 SUBPROGRAM [1] 70 mm SPECTACLE (ox) • Input source: Dolby Surround 2-ch Dolby Digital • Output channel: 3 channels • DSP: 2 (presence & surround) [2] DGTL SPECTACLE (gx) • Input source: Dolby Digital • Output channel: 5.1 channels • DSP: 3 (presence & surround L, R) [3] DTS SPECTACLE ( t x ) • Input source: DTS • Output channel: 5.1 channels • DSP: 3 (presence & surround L, R) [4] 70 mm SCI-FI ( o x ) • Input source: Dolby Surround 2-ch Dolby Digital • Output channel: 3 channels • DSP: 2 (presence & surround) [5] DGTL SCI-FI ( g x ) • Input source: Dolby Digital • Output channel: 5.1 channels • DSP: 3 (presence & surround L, R) [6] DTS SCI-FI ( t x ) • Input source: DTS • Output channel: 5.1 channels • DSP: 3 (presence & surround L, R) 3 MOVIE THEATER 2 [1] 70 mm ADVENTURE (ox) • Input source: Dolby Surround 2-ch Dolby Digital • Output channel: 3 channels • DSP: 2 (presence & surround) [2] DGTL ADVENTURE (gx) • Input source: Dolby Digital • Output channel: 5.1 channels • DSP: 3 (presence & surround L, R) [3] DTS ADVENTURE ( t x ) • Input source: DTS • Output channel: 5.1 channels • DSP: 3 (presence & surround L, R) [4] 70 mm GENERAL ( o x ) • Input source: Dolby Surround 2-ch Dolby Digital • Output channel: 3 channels • DSP: 2 (presence & surround) [5] DGTL GENERAL ( g x ) • Input source: Dolby Digital • Output channel: 5.1 channels • DSP: 3 (presence & surround L, R) [6] DTS GENERAL ( t x ) • Input source: DTS • Output channel: 5.1 channels • DSP: 3 (presence & surround L, R) FEATURES This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, giving both the video and the sound field incredible reality. It is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). Clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. Ideal for precisely reproducing the sound of the newest multi-track films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. The data for the sound field of an opera house are used for the front presence, so the threedimensional feeling of the sound field is emphasized, and dialog is precisely oriented on the screen. By using the data for the sound field of a concert hall on the surround sound field, powerful reverberations are generated. You can enjoy watching action, adventure movies, etc. with strong presence. This program is for reproducing sounds on a multi-track film, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The front presence of the sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. For the surround sound field, the harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully in a wide space at the rear of the sound field. 36 0107V596RDS35-37_EN 36 2/29/0, 3:30 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM No. 4 PROGRAM MONO MOVIE ( x ) This program is designed specifically to enhance monaural sources. Compared to a strictly mono setting, the sound image is wider and slightly forward of the speaker pair, lending an immediacy to the overall sound. It is particularly effective for old mono movie, news broadcasts and dialog. Monaural 1 channel 1 TV SPORTS ( x ) • Input source: • Output channel: • DSP: This program is furnished with a tight sound field in which the sound will not spread excessively at the front, but the rear surround produces dynamic sound expansion. It is the most suitable for sports programs. Audio/Video 2 to 5.1 channels 2 to 3 (presence & surround) INTRODUCTION • Input source: • Output channel: • DSP: 5 FEATURES ■ For Hi-Fi audio sources No. DISCO ( x ) • Input source: • Output channel: • DSP: 7 This program simulates the acoustic environment of a disco in the heart of a lively city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. 2-ch PCM/Analog audio 2 channels 1 ROCK CONCERT ( x ) • Input source: • Output channel: • DSP: This program is ideally suited for rock music. You will experience a dynamic and lively sound field. 2-ch PCM/Analog audio 2 channels 1 CONCERT HALL ( x ) • Input source: • Output channel: • DSP: This program creates the expansive ambience of a large concert hall. It is suited for orchestra and opera music. 2-ch PCM/Analog audio 2 channels 1 CINEMA DSP: Dolby Surround + DSP/Dolby Digital + DSP/DTS + DSP Digital sound fields are created in both the presence and rear surround zones of the Dolby Pro Logic-decoded sound field. They create a wide acoustic environment and emphasize the surround effect in the room, letting you feel as much presence as if you were watching a movie in a popular Dolby Stereo theater. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Dolby Pro Logic + 2 digital sound fields BASIC OPERATION 8 FEATURES PREPARATION 6 PROGRAM ■ Dolby Digital or DTS + 3 digital sound fields 0107V596RDS35-37_EN 37 2/29/0, 3:30 PM English 37 APPENDIX Digital sound fields are created in the presence zone and independently on the left and right surround zones of the Dolby Digital-decoded or DTS-decoded sound field. They create a wide acoustic environment and strong surround effect in the room without losing high channel separation. With the wide dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS sound, this sound field combination lets you feel as if you were watching a movie in the newest Dolby Digital theater or DTS-installed theater. This is the most ideal home theater sound at the present time. SET MENU This unit provides you with the following items on the SET MENU to maximize the performance of your system and expand your enjoyment for audio listening and video watching. 1. CENTER SP 2. REAR SP 3. MAIN SP 4. BASS OUT 5. MAIN LVL 6. D.D. LFE 7. D-RANGE 8. DTS LFE 9. CNTR DELAY 10.MEM. GUARD 11.TV INPUT 12.CBL INPUT 2 Press SET MENU repeatedly to select the item you want to adjust. The selected item appears on the display. y After pressing SET MENU once, you can also select the item by pressing d. (Pressing u goes back one selection.) 3 Press i or j repeatedly to adjust the setting. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the setting of any other item in the same way. Adjusting Items on the SET MENU Adjustments should be performed with the remote control while watching the information on the display. 3 1 2 1 Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode. If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week, the settings of the SET MENU will automatically return to the preset positions and values. If so, adjust the settings of the SET MENU again. 38 0108V596RDS38-44_EN 38 2/29/0, 3:30 PM SET MENU Description of Each Item 1. CENTER SP 3. MAIN SP Choices: LARGE/SMALL Preset position: LARGE SML (Small) Select this position if you use a center speaker that is smaller than the main speakers. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) on the center channel are distributed to the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal (or to the right and left main speakers if “BASS OUT” is set to the MAIN position). 2. REAR SP Choices: LARGE/SMALL Preset position: LARGE SW/BOTH Select either the SW or BOTH position if your system includes a subwoofer. In either position, signals on the LFE channel and low bass signals (below 90 Hz) on the center and rear channels are directed to the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal if “CENTER SP” is set to the SML or NONE position and “REAR SP” is set to the SMALL position. In the SW position, low bass signals on the main channels are directed to the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal if “MAIN SP” is set to the SMALL position. In the BOTH position, low bass signals on the main channels are directed to both the main speakers and the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal. Note • When playing a 2-channel source (tape, MD, CD, video cassette etc.), select the BOTH position to direct low bass signals (below 90 Hz) to the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal. MAIN Select this position if your system does not include a subwoofer. In this position, besides full-range signals on the main channels, signals on the LFE channel and other low bass signals (below 90 Hz) that are distributed from other channels are directed to the right and left main speakers. APPENDIX SMALL Select this position if your rear speakers do not have high ability for bass reproduction. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) on the rear channels are distributed to the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal (or to the right and left main speakers if “BASS OUT” is set to the MAIN position). Choices: SW/MAIN/BOTH Preset position: BOTH ADVANCED OPERATION LARGE Select this position if your rear speakers have high ability for bass reproduction, or if a subwoofer is connected in parallel to the rear speaker. In this position, full-range signals on the rear channels are directed to the rear speakers. 4. BASS OUT BASIC OPERATION NONE Select this position if you do not have a center speaker (4-speaker system). In this position, full-range signals on the center channel are directed to the right and left main speakers. SMALL Select this position if your main speakers do not have high ability for bass reproduction. However, if your system does not include a subwoofer, do not select this position. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) on the main channels are distributed to the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal if “BASS OUT” is set to the SW position. PREPARATION LRG (Large) Select this position if your center speaker is approximately the same size as the main speakers. In this position, fullrange signals on the center channel are directed to the center speaker. LARGE Select this position if your main speakers have high ability for bass reproduction. In this position, full-range signals on the main channels are directed to the right and left main speakers. INTRODUCTION Choices: LRG (Large)/SML (Small)/NONE Preset position: LRG (Large) English 39 0108V596RDS38-44_EN 39 2/29/0, 3:30 PM SET MENU 5. MAIN LVL Choices: NORM (Normal)/–10 dB Preset position: NORM (Normal) NORM (Normal) Normally select this position. –10 dB Select this position if the sound output from the main speakers is too loud and cannot be balanced with the sound output from the center and rear speakers. In this position, the sound output from the main speakers is attenuated. Notes • The setting of “CENTER SP”, “REAR SP”, “MAIN SP” and “BASS OUT” have no effect on a source connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals on the rear of this unit. • Once you have adjusted appropriately for “CENTER SP”, “REAR SP”, “MAIN SP”, “BASS OUT” and “MAIN LVL”, you do not have to change any settings unless your speaker system is modified. 6. D.D. LFE (Adjusting the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital) Control range: –20 dB to 0 dB (in 1 dB steps) Preset value: 0 dB Note • This adjustment is only effective when Dolby Digital is being decoded and the selected source encoded with Dolby Digital contains LFE signals. This adjusts the output level of the LFE channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals of other channels and they are directed to the same speakers, the ratio of the LFE signal level to the level of the other signals can be adjusted. 7. D-RANGE (Adjusting the dynamic range) Choices: MAX/STD (Standard)/MIN Preset position: MAX Note • This adjustment is only effective when Dolby Digital is being decoded. “Dynamic range” is the difference between the maximum level and the minimum level of sounds. Sounds on a movie originally designed for movie theaters feature a very wide dynamic range. Dolby Digital technology can modify the original sound track into a home audio format with this wide dynamic range unchanged. Powerful sounds of extremely wide dynamic range are not always suitable for home use. Depending on the condition of your listening environment, it may not be possible to increase the sound output to a level as high as that in a movie theater. However, at the normal level suitable for listening in your room, the low-level parts of source sound often cannot be heard well because they will be lost among noise in your environment. Dolby Digital technology has also made it possible to reduce an original sound track’s dynamic range for a home audio format by “compressing” the sound data. MAX In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital is reproduced in the original sound track’s wide dynamic range to provide you with powerful sounds just like those in a movie theater. Selecting this position will be even better if you can listen to a source at a high output level in a room specially soundproofed for audio/video enjoyment. STD (Standard) In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital is reproduced in the “compressed” dynamic range of the source that is suitable for low-level listening. MIN In this position, the dynamic range is more reduced than in the STD position. Selecting this position will be effective when you must listen to a source at a low level. Note • It may happen that sound is output faintly or not output normally depending on the source. In that case, select the MAX or STD position. 40 0108V596RDS38-44_EN 40 2/29/0, 3:30 PM SET MENU 8. DTS LFE (Adjusting the output level of the LFE channel for DTS) 10.MEM. GUARD (Locking the settings) Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB (in 1 dB steps) Preset value: 0 dB Choices: ON/OFF Preset position: OFF • This adjustment is effective only when DTS is being decoded and the selected source encoded with DTS contains LFE signals. 9. CNTR DELAY (Adjusting the delay of the sound from the center speaker) Control range: 0 ms to 5 ms (in 1 ms steps) Preset value: 0 ms The input mode for a source connected to the D-TV input terminals of this unit can be automatically set when the power of this unit is turned on. Refer to page 23 for details about the input mode. AUTO In this position, the input mode is always set to AUTO. LAST In this position, the input mode is automatically set to that selected the last time when the power of this unit was turned on. 12.CBL INPUT (Selecting the initial input mode for a source connected to the CBL/SAT input terminals) Choices: AUTO/LAST Preset position: AUTO APPENDIX The input mode for a source connected to the CBL/SAT input terminals of this unit can be automatically set when the power of this unit is turned on. Refer to page 23 for details about the input mode. ADVANCED OPERATION This makes sounds from the left main, center and right main speakers reach your listening position at the same time. This is achieved by delaying the sound from the center speaker if the distance from the center speaker to your listening position is shorter than the distance from the right and left main speaker to your listening position. Choices: AUTO/LAST Preset position: AUTO BASIC OPERATION This adjusts the delay between the main sound (on the main channels) and dialog, etc. (on the center channel). The larger the value, the later the dialog, etc. is generated. 11.TV INPUT (Selecting the initial input mode for a source connected to the D-TV input terminals) PREPARATION This adjusts the output level of the LFE channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals of other channels and they are directed to the same speakers, the ratio of the LFE signal level to the level of the other signals can be adjusted. If you wish to prevent accidental alterations to the settings of the SET MENU and other adjustments on this unit, select the ON position. The following settings on this unit can be locked: • Settings of other items on the SET MENU • Settings in the TIME/LEVEL mode • Settings when using TEST INTRODUCTION Note AUTO In this position, the input mode is always set to AUTO. 41 0108V596RDS38-44_EN 41 2/29/0, 3:30 PM English LAST In this position, the input mode is automatically set to that selected the last time when the power of this unit was turned on. DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS When using the digital sound field processor with the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder or DTS decoder, you can adjust the delay time between the main sound and sound effect, and each speaker’s output level as you wish. Note • When high-rate 96-kHz sampling 24-bit digital signals are input to this unit, the delay time and speaker output levels cannot be adjusted. You can adjust the time difference between the beginning of the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the value, the later the sound effect is generated. The delay time can be individually adjusted to all DSP programs. Notes • Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with some sources. • The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay time. Program 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of each speaker even if it has already been adjusted in “ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE” on pages 19 and 20. Notes Delay Time 1. Sound Output Level of the Center, Right Rear and Left Rear Speakers, and Subwoofer PRO LOGIC/Normal DOLBY DIGITAL/Normal DTS DGTL SUR/Normal PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED DTS DGTL SUR/ENHANCED 70 mm SPECTACLE DGTL SPECTACLE DTS SPECTACLE 70 mm SCI-FI DGTL SCI-FI DTS SCI-FI 70 mm ADVENTURE DGTL ADVENTURE DTS ADVENTURE 70 mm GENERAL DGTL GENERAL DTS GENERAL MONO MOVIE TV SPORTS DISCO ROCK CONCERT CONCERT HALL Control range (ms) 15 to 30 0 to 15 0 to 15 15 to 30 0 to 15 0 to 15 15 to 30 1 to 99 1 to 99 15 to 30 1 to 99 1 to 99 15 to 30 1 to 99 1 to 99 15 to 30 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 Preset value 20 5 5 20 5 5 23 15 15 20 16 16 20 15 15 20 15 15 49 9 40 16 44 • The sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted when the input signal is analog, PCM audio, or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2-channel. • If “CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to the NONE position, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted. This is because the center channel sound is automatically output from the right and left main speakers. • Once the sound output level has been adjusted, the level will be the same for all DSP programs. Speaker Center Right rear Left rear Subwoofer Control range (dB) MIN, –20 to +10 MIN, –20 to +10 MIN, –20 to +10 MIN, –20 to 0 42 0108V596RDS38-44_EN 42 3/8/0, 12:32 PM Preset value 0 0 0 0 DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS Adjusting Method Press i or j to adjust the delay time or speaker output levels. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the settings of any other item. Adjustments should be performed with the remote control while watching the information on the display. 3 1 2 2 Press TIME/LEVEL repeatedly to select the item you want to adjust. Each time you press TIME/LEVEL, the selected item changes and appears on the display as shown below. DELAY CENTER Delay time Center speaker output level Right rear speaker output level L SUR. Left rear speaker output level ADVANCED OPERATION R SUR. SWFR BASIC OPERATION Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. PREPARATION 1 Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode. If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week, the latest values for the delay time and the center/rear/ subwoofer output levels that were set will automatically return to the preset values. If so, adjust the delay time and output levels again. INTRODUCTION 3 Subwoofer output level y You can also select the item by pressing d. (Pressing u changes the selection in the reverse order.) APPENDIX Note • Depending on the setting of the SET MENU, you may not be able to select all these items. English 43 0108V596RDS38-44_EN 43 2/29/0, 3:30 PM SLEEP TIMER The SLEEP timer can be used to automatically set this unit in the standby mode. This timer is useful when you are going to sleep while enjoying the desired input source. The SLEEP timer can only be set with the remote control. Note • The SLEEP timer is effective for the components connected to the AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. Canceling the Selected SLEEP Timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the display. It will soon disappear and the “SLEEP” indicator will go off. Setting the SLEEP Timer 2 Note • The SLEEP timer can also be canceled by setting the unit in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel), or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC power outlet. 3 1 Play a source you want to enjoy when you are going to sleep. 2 Set the selector dial to a position other than the TV position. 3 Press SLEEP repeatedly to select the desired SLEEP time. Each time you press SLEEP, the SLEEP time will change as below: 120 90 60 30 The SLEEP timer is off (SLEEP OFF). (This is the state before SLEEP is pressed.) Flashes 4 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the display after the SLEEP timer has been set. The display returns to the previous indication. Lights up 44 0108V596RDS38-44_EN 44 2/29/0, 3:30 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL Selector Dial There are nine positions that you can select to control connected components with this remote control. For example, if the CD position is selected, the remote control is set in the CD operation mode, allowing the CD player to be operated by the buttons on the remote control. When turning the selector dial, the position changes as follows: TAPE/MD The code for a YAMAHA tape deck is factory set. (Be sure to set the proper code when operating an MD recorder.) CD The code for a YAMAHA CD player is factory set. CBL/SAT A cable TV or satellite tuner can be controlled. DVD/LD & DVD MENU An LD player can be controlled in the DVD/ LD position. A DVD player can be controlled in the DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions. The code for a YAMAHA DVD player is factory set. If the remote control does not operate your YAMAHA DVD player, you need to set the code number “0048”. Selector dial VCR A VCR can be controlled. DSP/TUN This unit can be controlled and DSP programs can be selected directly. Note • The button functions on the remote control differ depending on the position of the selector dial. Refer to the following pages for details. Commonly used buttons in any position of the selector dial ADVANCED OPERATION Regardless of the position of the selector dial, you can control this unit and your TV with the following buttons. Note • You have to set the code for your TV before you can control the TV. ■ Controlling this unit Refer to pages 7 and 8. 1 ! @ 2 1 2 3 4 # 3 Note STANDBY POWER VOLUME (+/–) SLEEP • If you have set the code for your TV and set the selector dial to the TV position, this button is used to set the SLEEP timer for the TV. 5 MUTE APPENDIX 4 5 BASIC OPERATION TV A TV can be controlled. PREPARATION AMP/TUN You can perform the basic operations of this unit. Refer to pages 7 and 8. INTRODUCTION The provided remote control is factory set to control not only this unit but also most YAMAHA audio components connected to it. Note • If you have set the code for your TV and set the selector dial to the TV position, this button is used to mute the TV sound. English ■ Controlling your TV ! TV POWER @ TV INPUT # TV VOLUME 45 0109V596RDS45-52_EN 45 2/29/0, 3:30 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL Controlling the Components Connected to This Unit ■ Example: To control a YAMAHA CD player 2 6 4 5 3 7 1 Make sure that VOLUME is set to the “m” position. 2 Set the selector dial to the CD position. 3 Turn on the power. 4 Press INPUT. The indicator lights up for about three second. 5 Press CD (number 1) while the indicator is lit. 6 Press p. Refer to page 48 for the CD player operation buttons. 7 Adjust the volume. If you set the remote control with the manufacturers’ codes listed from page i at the end of this manual, you can control other brands of components. Refer to “Setup codes” on page 51 for details. 46 0109V596RDS45-52_EN 46 2/29/0, 3:30 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL Description of Each Position ■ TAPE/MD position INTRODUCTION Select the TAPE/MD position. DECK A/B (TAPE) This button selects deck A or B on a doublecassette tape deck. DISPLAY (MD) p PLAY This button plays a tape or an MD. e PAUSE (MD) This button gives a pause in operation. w REWIND (TAPE) This button rewinds a tape. SEARCH (MD) This button initiates a backward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. a DIR B (TAPE) This button selects the playing direction of deck B. SKIP+ (MD) This button skips to the beginning of the next track. s STOP This button stops operation on a tape deck or MD recorder. f FAST FORWARD (TAPE) This button winds a tape fast forward. SEARCH (MD) This button initiates a fast-forward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. English • The dark-shaded buttons do not function. • If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 47 0109V596RDS45-52_EN 47 2/29/0, 3:30 PM APPENDIX AV POWER (TAPE) This button turns on the tape deck that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code for another manufacturer. (MD) This button turns on the MD recorder that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code for another manufacturer. ADVANCED OPERATION b DIR A (TAPE) This button selects the playing direction of deck A. SKIP– (MD) This button skips to the beginning of the previous track. BASIC OPERATION r REC/PAUSE This button gives a pause in recording on a tape deck or MD recorder. PREPARATION Numeric buttons (MD) +10 (MD) While the indicator lights up for about three seconds after pressing DSP, this button turns on or off the effect speakers (center and rear). PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ CD position Select the CD position. Numeric buttons INDEX DISC SKIP+/– (for a CD player with CD changer) These buttons skip to the next or previous CD. +10 While the indicator lights up for about three seconds after pressing DSP, this button turns on or off the effect speakers (center and rear). DISPLAY e PAUSE This button gives a pause in operation. The button functions as PAUSE/STOP* for operating a YAMAHA CD player under factory setting. p PLAY This button plays a CD. b SKIP– This button skips to the beginning of the previous track. a SKIP+ This button skips to the beginning of the next track. s STOP This button stops operation. The button functions as PAUSE/STOP* for operating YAMAHA CD player under factory setting. w SEARCH This button initiates a backward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. f SEARCH This button initiates a fast-forward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. AV POWER This button turns on the CD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code for another manufacturer. y PAUSE/STOP function Press the button once to give a pause in operation and press once more to stop operation. • The dark-shaded buttons do not function. • If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 48 0109V596RDS45-52_EN 48 2/29/0, 3:30 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ DVD/LD position INTRODUCTION Select the DVD/LD position. Numeric buttons TITLE/INDEX +10 DISC SKIP+/– SKIP– SEARCH DISPLAY PAUSE ■ DVD MENU position Note • DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players. BASIC OPERATION SKIP+ STOP SEARCH AV POWER (DVD) This button turns on the YAMAHA DVD player if you have set the code number “0048”. Also this button turns on the DVD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code for another manufacturer. (LD) This button turns on the LD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code for another manufacturer. PREPARATION PLAY ADVANCED OPERATION Select the DVD MENU position. Numeric buttons TITLE/INDEX +10 DISC SKIP+/– RETURN MENU SELECT TITLE MENU RIGHT MENU DOWN MENU AV POWER This button turns on the YAMAHA DVD player if you have set the code number “0048”. Also this button turns on the DVD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code for another manufacturer. English • The dark-shaded buttons do not function. • If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 49 0109V596RDS45-52_EN 49 2/29/0, 3:30 PM APPENDIX MENU LEFT DISPLAY MENU UP PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ VCR position ■ CBL/SAT position Select the VCR position. Select the CBL/SAT position. VCR REC Press this button twice to start recording. Numeric buttons Numeric buttons ENTER/RECALL ENTER +10 +10 CHANNEL +/– DISPLAY PAUSE PLAY CHANNEL +/– MENU SELECT MENU LEFT STOP FAST FORWARD REWIND RECALL AV POWER This button turns on a VCR that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code for your VCR. DISPLAY/ GUIDE (SAT) MENU UP MENU RIGHT MENU DOWN MENU AV POWER This button turns on a cable TV/satellite tuner that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code for your cable TV/satellite tuner. ■ TV position Note • You can control your VCR if you have set the code for it. Select the TV position. Numeric buttons ENTER/RECALL +10 VCR REC Press this button twice. VCR PLAY CHANNEL +/– DISPLAY VCR PAUSE VCR REWIND TV POWER This button turns on a TV that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code for your TV. VCR STOP VCR FAST FORWARD VCR POWER TV VOL TV INPUT TV SLEEP TV MUTE • The dark-shaded buttons do not function. • If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 50 0109V596RDS45-52_EN 50 2/29/0, 3:30 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL Advanced Information ■ Setup codes 1 2 3 Press i (right) and j (left) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. Press AV POWER (or any other button) on the remote control to check if you have set the code correctly. If your component cannot be controlled with the remote control, try setting another code for the same manufacturer. Notes 3 Press i (right) and j (left) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 4 Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit code for the second (and third) VCR. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash or flashes rapidly several times, repeat step 3 and re-enter the code. 5 Press AV POWER (or any other button) on the remote control to check if you have set the code correctly. If the VCR cannot be controlled with the remote control, try setting another code for the same manufacturer. Set the selector dial to the CBL/SAT or DVD MENU position. English 51 0109V596RDS45-52_EN 51 APPENDIX • You can set only one code for one position. • In the DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions: Be sure to set the selector dial to the DVD/LD position before entering the code for the DVD/LD player. The code set in the DVD/LD position is also simultaneously set in the DVD MENU position. You cannot set the code for a DVD player when the selector dial is set to the DVD MENU position. • If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, use the original remote control supplied with your component. Turn on the VCR to be used. ADVANCED OPERATION Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit manufacturer’s code for the component to be used. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash or flashes rapidly several times, repeat step 3 and re-enter the code. 1 2 BASIC OPERATION 5 Set the selector dial to the desired position for the component (TAPE/MD, CD, DVD/LD, etc.). Note • If you want to control a second (and third) VCR in the DVD MENU position, you must set the code for an LD player in the DVD/LD position. PREPARATION 4 Turn on your component to be used. You can control a second (and third) VCR in the CBL/SAT and DVD MENU positions if a cable TV or satellite tuner, or DVD player is not being used. INTRODUCTION You can set the code for the manufacturer of your component in each position of the selector dial. ■ To use a second (and third) VCR 2/29/0, 3:30 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ Returning to the factory-set codes To return to the factory-set codes in all positions, follow these steps. 1 2 To return to the factory-set codes in each position, follow these steps. 1 Press i (right) and j (left) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. Set the selector dial to the position for the component to be returned to the factory-set code. 2 Press i (right) and j (left) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. Enter the code number “9990”. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. 3 Enter the code number “0000”. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. The following codes are factory set. Selector dial position TV CBL/SAT VCR DVD/LD CD TAPE/MD AMP/TUN DSP/TUN Component Code TV Satellite tuner VCR DVD player CD player Tape deck this unit this unit 0101 0006 0002 0008 (YAMAHA DVD player) 0005 (YAMAHA CD player) 0004 (YAMAHA Tape deck) 0003 0013 We recommend that you write all the code numbers you have set on the “Quick Reference Card”. 52 0109V596RDS45-52_EN 52 2/29/0, 3:30 PM APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING ■ General SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY Refer to page The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Firmly connect the power cord. 18 The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to the right or left position. Set the switch fully to the right or left position when the unit is in the standby mode. 18 The unit does not work normally. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (lightning, excessive static electricity, etc.) or by a power supply with low voltage. Set the unit in the standby mode and disconnect the AC power cord from the AC power outlet. After about 30 seconds have passed, connect the power and operate the unit again. — No sound and/or no picture. Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT SELECTOR or TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER (or the input selector buttons). 21 The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 16 SPEAKERS have not been set properly. Set SPEAKERS corresponding to the speakers in use to the ON position. 21 The sound is muted. Set VOLUME to the “m” position, press MUTE to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 22 Digital signals other than PCM audio and the signals encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS which this unit cannot reproduce are being input to this unit by a CD-ROM, etc. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — No picture. There is no S VIDEO connection between this unit and the TV monitor, although S video signals are being input to this unit. Connect the monitor’s “S” video input terminal to this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal. 14 The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Set the unit in the standby mode and then turn on to reset the protection circuit. — The SLEEP timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again. 44 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 16 Incorrect setting of BALANCE. Adjust it to the appropriate position. 22 The sound effect is off. Press EFFECT to turn it on. 26 A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Select another DSP program. 37 APPENDIX The 96-kHz sampling 24-bit digital signals are input to this unit. ADVANCED OPERATION No sound from the effect speakers. BASIC OPERATION Only the speaker on one side can be heard. 13, 14 PREPARATION The unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. INTRODUCTION If the unit fails to operate normally, check the following points to determine whether the fault can be corrected by the simple measures suggested. If it cannot be corrected, or if the fault is not listed in the SYMPTOM column, disconnect the power cord and contact your authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. 24 English 53 0110V596RDS53-59_EN 53 2/29/0, 3:30 PM TROUBLESHOOTING SYMPTOM No sound from the center speaker. CAUSE REMEDY The sound output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 42 “CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to the NONE position. Select the LRG or SML position. 39 Incorrect DSP program is selected. Select the appropriate program. No sound from the subwoofer. The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers. 42 A monaural source is being played with the PRO LOGIC/Normal or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED program. Select another DSP program suitable for the monaural source. 37 “BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to the SW or MAIN position when playing a 2-channel source. Select the BOTH position. 39 The source does not contain low bass signals (below 90 Hz). A “humming” sound can be heard. 35, 36, 37 — The source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS does not have a center channel signal. No sound from the rear speakers. Refer to page — 13, 14 Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Make the GND connection between the turntable and this unit. 13 The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to the unit through the MC head amplifier. 13 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the TAPE/MD OUT (REC) terminals of this unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power to the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect by a tape deck or MD recorder connected to the TAPE/MD OUT (REC) terminals of this unit. The DVD/LD, TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner source cannot be recorded by a tape deck, MD recorder or VCR connected to this unit. The DVD/LD player, TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner is connected to the unit only through the digital terminals. Make additional connections between the analog terminals. 14 Adjusting this unit by using SET MENU, TIME/ LEVEL or TEST cannot be performed. “MEM. GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to the ON position. Set “MEM. GUARD” to the OFF position. 41 34 54 0110V596RDS53-59_EN 54 2/29/0, 3:30 PM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner SYMPTOM CAUSE There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM FM antenna. The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. There is multipath interference. Refer to page Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. Use the manual tuning method. 11, 27 Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. 11 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use the manual tuning method. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. The unit has been disconnected for a long period. Re-store the stations. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. Use the manual tuning method. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. 12 A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — 28 12, 27 ■ Remote control SYMPTOM The remote control does not work. REMEDY Refer to page Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition the unit. The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones. 2 The component to be controlled has not been selected. Set the selector dial to the appropriate position, corresponding to the component to be controlled. 45 The remote control cannot control system components. 3 ADVANCED OPERATION The unit or other component cannot be controlled. CAUSE — The manufacturer’s code has not been set properly. Enter the code again. Depending on the manufacturer or the model, some components cannot be controlled with this unit’s remote control even though the code has been set properly. Use the original remote control supplied with your component. 51 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer. — CAUSE REMEDY Refer to page This unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power of the unit. — There is noise interference from digital or high-frequency equipment, or the unit. The unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move the unit further away from such equipment. — English The sound is degraded when listening with headphones to a tape deck or CD player connected to this unit. 55 0110V596RDS53-59_EN 55 2/29/0, 3:30 PM APPENDIX ■ Others SYMPTOM BASIC OPERATION There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). 11, 27 PREPARATION There are continuous AM crackling and hissing noises. INTRODUCTION FM stereo reception is noisy. REMEDY TROUBLESHOOTING ■ When playing back a source encoded with DTS SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY Refer to page A loud hissing noise is heard when playing back a source encoded with DTS. The player which plays back the source is not connected to a digital audio signal input terminal of this unit. The player must be connected to a digital audio signal input terminal of this unit besides the analog audio signal terminal connections. 14 The input mode is set to ANALOG on this unit. Set a proper input mode to turn on the built-in DTS decoder. 23 A percussive noise is heard when playing back a source encoded with DTS. If the input mode is set to AUTO, depending on some sources, there may be a noise heard while this unit is identifying the format of the input signal. Set the input mode of the currently selected input source to DTS. 23 No sound is heard when playing back a source encoded with DTS, even if the input mode is set to AUTO on this unit. The built-in DTS decoder does not function because the player has a digital volume control and it is set at a position other than “maximum,” “neutral” or “ineffective.” Set the player’s digital volume control at the maximum, neutral or ineffective position. — No sound is heard when playing back an MD or DAT on which has been recorded a source encoded with DTS. A source encoded with DTS cannot be recorded on an MD or DAT. No sound is heard when playing back a source (CD, etc.) even if the currently selected input mode is AUTO. In the AUTO mode, the DTS-decoding mode cannot be automatically changed to the normal (PCM) digital signal input mode. — Set the input mode to AUTO again. 24 Notes • It is necessary to use a DTS decoder to play back a source encoded with DTS, so the player which plays back the source must be connected to a digital audio input terminal of this unit in the way described in this manual. If this connection is not made or only a D-to-A converter is being used without using a DTS decoder, only a loud hissing noise will be heard when you play back the source. • The “t” indicator will flash when the input mode is set to AUTO and a search or skip operation is performed while playing back a source encoded with DTS. If this status continues for 30 or more seconds, the unit will automatically switch from DTS-decoding mode to PCM digital signal input mode and the “t” indicator will go out. 56 0110V596RDS53-59_EN 56 2/29/0, 3:30 PM SPECIFICATIONS FM SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms Main L/R, Center, Rear L/R ....................................... 100 W*/70 W 1 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 ohms Main L/R, Center, Rear L/R ....................................... 110 W*/80 W • Tuning Range .................................... 87.5/87.50 to 107.9/108.00 MHz • Maximum Output Power (EIAJ) 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ohms ........................................................ 105 W • DIN Standard Output Power 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms ....................................................... 110 W • IEC Output Power 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ....................................................... 75 W • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms ................................................................ 80 • Frequency Response CD etc. to MAIN L/R ................................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion (20 Hz to 20 kHz) CD etc. to MAIN L/R, 1/2 power, 8 ohms .............................. 0.06% • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) MAIN L/R .............................................................................. 150 µV • Input Sensitivity/Impedance CD etc. ................................................................. 150 mV/47 k-ohms EXT. DECODER ......................................... 150 mV/40 – 47 k-ohms • Channel Separation (Vol. –30 dB) CD etc. (Input 5.1 k-ohms Terminated, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ..................................................................................... 60 dB/45 dB • Tone Control Characteristics BASS: Boost/cut .......................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE: Boost/cut ................................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz * for U.S.A. and Canada models VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type ........................................................... NTSC or PAL • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ........................................................................ 0.1/0.2% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ........................................................... 48 dB • Frequency Response ........................................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, ±1 dB • Antenna Input ...................................................... 75 ohms, Unbalanced AM SECTION • Tuning Range ............................................ 530/531 to 1,710/1,611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ................................................................. 300 µV/m • Signal-to-Noise Ratio ................................................................... 52 dB • Antenna ........................................................................... Loop antenna GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Europe, U.K. and Singapore models] .................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz [Australia model] ..................................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [China model] ......................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [General model] ............................. AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption ...................................................... approx. 310 W • Power Consumption (standby mode) ................................. approx. 1 W • AC Outlets (100 W max. total) [U.K. and Australia models] ..................................... 1 (SWITCHED) [Other models] .......................................................... 2 (SWITCHED) • Dimensions (W x H x D) ..................... 435 x 151 x 391 mm (17-1/8’’ x 5-15/16’’ x 15-3/8’’) • Weight ......................................................................... 11.2 kg (25 lbs.) • Accessories ................................................................ AM loop antenna .......................................................................... Indoor FM antenna ..................... 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) ........................ Antenna adapter (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ................................................................................. Remote control ........................................................................................... Batteries ADVANCED OPERATION • Output Level/Impedance REC OUT ........................................................... 150 mV/1.2 k-ohms PRE OUT ............................................................... 2.1 V/1.2 k-ohms SUBWOOFER ....................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 k-ohms PHONES ................................................................. 0.34 V/560 ohms • Signal-to-Noise Ratio (Mono/Stereo) DIN ................................................................................. 75 dB/69 dB IHF ................................................................................. 81 dB/75 dB BASIC OPERATION • Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD etc. to MAIN L/R (150 mV, Input Shorted) ........................................................ 99 dB (250 mV, Input Shorted) ....................................................... 103 dB • Selectivity (two signals, 40 kHz Dev., ±300 kHz) ...................... 55 dB PREPARATION • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 ohms ..................... 130/150/190/240 W*, 90/110/135/160 W • Usable Sensitivity (DIN) Mono (S/N 26 dB) ................................................................... 0.9 µV Stereo (S/N 46 dB) ................................................................... 28 µV INTRODUCTION AUDIO SECTION Specifications are subject to change without notice. APPENDIX • Video Signal Level ...................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms • Signal-to-Noise Ratio .................................................................. 50 dB • Monitor Out Frequency Response .................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB English 57 0110V596RDS53-59_EN 57 9/29/0, 10:08 AM GLOSSARY ■ Dolby Surround ■ CINEMA DSP CINEMA DSP Dolby Surround uses four discrete channels and five speakers to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: two main channels (left and right), a center channel for dialog, and a rear channel for special sound effects. The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Most video tapes and laser discs include Dolby Surround encoding, as do many TV and cable broadcasts. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that stabilizes each channel for even more accurate sound positioning than is available with standard analog processors. The Dolby Surround and Dolby Digital sound and DTS systems show their full ability in a large movie theater, because movie sounds are originally designed to be reproduced in a large movie theater that uses a multitude of speakers. Trying to create a sound environment similar to that of a movie theater in your home is difficult because of the room size, material inside the walls, the number of speakers, and so on. In other words, your listening room is very different from a movie theater. However, YAMAHA DSP technology allows you to create nearly the same sound experience as that of a large movie theater in your home by compensating for the lack of presence and dynamics in the listening room with original digital sound fields combined with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround sounds. The YAMAHA “CINEMA DSP” logo indicates those programs that are created by the combination of YAMAHA DSP technology and Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that provides completely independent multi-channel audio to you. Dolby Digital provides five full-range channels in what is sometimes referred to as a “3/2” configuration: three front channels (left, center and right), and two surround channels. A sixth bass-only effect channel is also provided for output of LFE (low frequency effect), or low bass effects that are independent of other channels. (This is called the “LFE channel”.) This channel is counted as 0.1, thus giving rise to the term 5.1 channels in total. The wide dynamic range of sound reproduced by the five full-range channels and precise sound orientation by digital sound processing provides listeners with excitement and realism that have never been experienced before. ■ DTS (Digital Theater System) Digital Surround DTS was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with six discrete channels of digital soundtracks, and it is now installed in many theaters around the world. The DTS digital playback system changed the way we experienced movies in theaters with six discrete channels of superb digital audio. DTS technology, through intense research and development has made it possible to deliver similar encode/decode discrete technology to home audio surround-sound entertainment. DTS Digital Surround is an encode/decode system which delivers six channels of master-quality, 20-bit audio; technically, it is 5.1 channels, which means 5 full-range (left, center, right and two surround) channels, plus a subwoofer (LFE) channel (as “0.1”). It is compatible with the 5.1 speaker configurations that are currently available for home theater systems. ■ LFE 0.1 Channel This channel is for reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is called the channel 0.1 because it only reproduces a low frequency range compared to the full-range from 20 Hz to 20 kHz that is reproduced by the 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel system. ■ S VIDEO Signal The S VIDEO signal is separated and transmitted as the Y signal which indicates the luminance and the C signal which indicates the chroma of the video signal (composite signal). Using the S VIDEO terminal eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. 58 0110V596RDS53-59_EN 58 2/29/0, 3:30 PM INDEX M Accessories .......................................................................... 2 AC outlet ........................................................................... 18 Antennas ...................................................................... 11, 12 Muting ............................................................................... 22 B BALANCE ........................................................................ 22 BGV (background video) function .................................... 22 C Delay time (TIME/LEVEL mode) .................................... 42 Display ................................................................................. 6 Dolby Digital ..................................................................... 58 Dolby Surround ................................................................. 58 DSP program ...................................................... 25, 35 to 37 DTS Digital Surround ....................................................... 58 R RDS mode EON function .............................................................. 33 PTY SEEK function .................................................... 32 Recording .......................................................................... 34 Remote control Basic operations ........................................................ 7, 8 Batteries ......................................................................... 2 Factory-set code .......................................................... 52 Manufacturer’s codes .......... i (at the end of this manual) Selector dial ............................................................. 7, 45 Setup codes .................................................................. 51 S T IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch ................................... 18 Input mode ......................................................................... 23 Test tone ....................................................................... 19, 20 Tone controls ..................................................................... 22 Tuning Automatic tuning ......................................................... 27 Manual tuning ............................................................. 27 External decoder ................................................................ 15 F L LFE ........................................................................ 40, 41, 58 APPENDIX I E ADVANCED OPERATION Front panel ........................................................................... 4 SET MENU ....................................................................... 38 Sleep timer ......................................................................... 44 Speaker Output levels (TIME/LEVEL mode) .......................... 42 Output mode (SET MENU) .................................. 39, 40 Speaker balance (test tone) .......................................... 19 Placement ...................................................................... 9 STANDBY/ON .................................................................... 4 BASIC OPERATION D Playing ............................................................................... 21 Preset stations To recall a preset station .............................................. 29 Exchanging preset stations .......................................... 30 Preset tuning Automatic preset tuning .............................................. 28 Manual preset tuning ................................................... 29 PREPARATION Canceling sound effect ...................................................... 26 CINEMA DSP ............................................................. 37, 58 Connections Antennas ................................................................ 11, 12 Audio components (tape deck/MD recorder, CD player and turntable) .............................................................. 13 Digital connections ...................................................... 14 Speakers ...................................................................... 16 TV monitor .................................................................. 14 Video components (DVD/LD player, VCR, TV/digital TV and cable TV/satellite tuner) ................................. 14 P INTRODUCTION A English 59 0110V596RDS53-59_EN 59 2/29/0, 3:30 PM LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT VERZEICHNIS DER HERSTELLERCODES LISTA ÖVER TILLVERKARKODER ELENCO DEI CODICI DEL FABBRICANTE LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE FABRICANTES LIJST VAN CODES VAN FABRIKANT CLARIVOX 0821, 0961, 1971 CLATRONIC 1181, 1331 CONCERTO 0791 CONDOR 0761 CONTEC 0151, 1171 CONTINENTAL EDISON 0571, 0651, 0901 CRAIG 1171 CROSLEY 0021, 0491, 1021, 1081, 1401, 1981, 2201, 2251, 2271 CROWN 2541 CTC CLATRONIC 0261 CXC 1171 DAEWOO 0101, 1501, 1511, 2611 DANSAI 0101 DECCA 0271, 0581, 0601, 0971, 1101, 1691 DECCA (UK) 0271, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1681 DEGRAAF 0451, 1351 DIXI 0991, 1511 DOMEOS 0101 DORIC 1031 DUAL 0091, 0601, 1611, 1641, 2101 DUAL-TEC 0601, 1511, 1621, 2111 DUMONT 0261, 0521, 0781, 1021, 1081, 1981, 2121, 2151 DYNATRON 0101 ELBE 1551, 1971, 2031 ELECTRO TECH 1511 ELEKTRONSKA 0771 ELMAN 0261, 1621 ELTA 1511 EMERSON 0921, 1021, 1081, 1121, 1171, 1261, 1301 ERRES 0101 ETRON 1981 EUROPHON 0261, 0581, 0601, 0771, 1091, 1621, 2001 FENNER 0101, 1511 FERGUSON 0281, 0371, 0551, 0651, 0781, 0861, 0881, 1131, 1181, 1361, 1461, 1971, 1991, 2281, 2311, 2341 FIDELITY 0451, 0761, 2281 FIDELITY (UK) 0561, 0591, 1931, 2281 FILMNET 1141 FINLANDIA 0451, 2321 FINLUX 0021, 0261, 0491, 0521, 0781, 0811, 0871, 1081, 1411, 1421, 1981, 2051, 2091, 2121, 2151, 2551 TV ADMIRAL 0411, 0451, 0911, 1021, 1081 AIKO 0891 AKAI 0061, 0101, 0231, 1191, 1351, 1591, 1641, 1791, 1891, 1981 AKURA 1331 ALBA 1241, 1331, 2361 ALBIRAL 1971 AMSTRAD 1301, 1511 ANAM 1171 ARC EN CIEL 0571 ARCAM 0571, 0761 ARISTONA 0751 ARTHUR MARTIN 0451, 1641 ASA 0411, 0451, 0521, 0781, 0871, 1021, 1081, 1421, 2051, 2091, 2151, 2551 ASTRA 1511 ATANTIC 0761 ATLANTIC 0761 ATORI 1511 AUDIOSONIC 1181, 1321, 1511 AUSIND 0491, 1411 AUTOVOX 0091, 0351, 0481, 0491, 0601, 0781, 0951, 1051, 1081, 1391, 1421 BAIRD 1101, 1351 BANG & OLUFSEN 1081 BASIC LINE 1321, 1331 BAUER 1451 BAUR 0041, 0061, 0121, 0131, 0221, 1561 BEKO 2491, 2501 BLAUPUNKT 0221, 0231, 0241, 0251, 0471, 0741, 2201, 2211, 2221, 2231, 2241, 2261, 2571, 2581 BRANDT 0571, 0651, 0731, 0901, 1821 BRIONVEGA 1021, 1051, 1081 BRITANNIA 0761 BRUNS 0821, 0991, 1021, 1081 BSR 0391, 0691, 1621, 1901, 1981 BUSH 0451, 1241, 1331, 1641, 1741, 2131, 2151 BUSH (UK) 0481, 1561, 1611 CANDLE 0791 CENTURY 1021, 1081 CGE 0491, 0811, 0981, 1401, 1531, 1611, 1621, 1981, 2201, 2251, 2271 CITIZEN 0791 FIRST LINE FISHER 1981 0021, 0091, 0141, 0511, 0601, 0801, 0821, 0981, 1021, 1081, 1981, 2091 FORGESTONE 2281 FORMENTI 0451, 0491, 0761, 1081, 1451, 1541, 1981 FORMENTI-PHOENIX 0021, 0431, 0451, 0591, 1411 FORTRESS 1081 FRONTECH 0451, 1181, 1981 FUJITSU 1261 FUNAI 0391, 0691, 1171, 1181, 1261 FUTURETECH 1171 GBC 0021, 0141, 1321, 1511, 1621, 1981 GEC 0451, 1101, 1281, 2321 GEC (UK) 0031, 0081, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1281, 1561 GELOSO 0021, 0411, 0451, 1321, 1511, 1621, 1981 GENERAL TECHNIC 2681 GENEXXA 0451, 1331 GOLDSTAR 0591, 0601, 0761, 0791, 1371, 1491, 1511, 1561, 1621, 1641 GOODMANS 0141, 1101, 1371, 1641, 2301 GORENJE 0981, 1061 GRAETZ 0451 GRANADA 0141, 0451, 0491, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1111, 1351, 1981, 2321 GRANADA (UK) 0081, 0141, 0451, 0491, 0581, 0601, 1031, 1311, 1521, 1561, 1641 GRUNDIG 0221, 0231, 0471, 0491, 0711, 0741, 1381, 2021, 2041, 2141, 2151 HANSEATIC 0021, 0121, 0141, 0431, 0591, 1561 HANTAREX 0581 HEMMERMANN 0061 HIFIVOX 0331, 0571 HINARI 0071, 0141, 0451, 1261, 1351, 1511, 1641, 1981, 2011 HITACHI 0001, 0011, 0031, 0081, 0141, 0291, 0331, 0341, 0451, 0601, 0631, 0701, 1281, 1561, 1601, 1821, 1831, 1841, 1861, 1871, 1881, 1891, 1941, 1981, 2051, 2321, 2341 HYPER 0591, 0601, 1511, 1621 IMPERIAL 0451, 0491, 0811, 0981, 1401, 1611, 1621, 2201, 2251, 2271 INGERSOL 1511 INNO HIT 0581, 0601, 0841, 1101, 1331, 1371, 1511, 2011 INNOVATION 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2711, 2721, 2761, 2771, 2781 INTERFUNK 0031, 0041, 0061, 0121, 0181, 0451, 0491, 1081, 1641, 1791, 1821, 1981, 2231 IRRADIO 0491, 1321, 1331, 1371, 1411, 1511, 2011 ISUKAI 1331 ITT 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431 ITT-NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431 JVC 0071, 0721, 1441, 1581, 1591, 1741, 1791 KAISUI 0591, 1321, 1331 KAMOSONIC 0601 KARCHER 0591, 0601, 0841, 1091, 1321, 1511, 1561, 2051 KAWASHO 0761 KENDO 0261 KENNEDY 0021, 0351, 0951, 1981 KONKA 2701 KORTING 0431, 1011, 1021, 1081, 1541 i 08V596RDS_code(EU) 1 2/29/0, 7:00 PM NECKERMANN KTV LENOIR LEYEO LIFETEC 0601, 1171 0601, 1511 1181 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2671, 2681, 2691, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 LOEWE OPTA 0121, 0131, 0581, 0611, 1081 LOGIC 1691, 2281 LOGIK 0551, 1681, 2281 LOWEWE 0831 LUMA 0351, 0451, 1901 LUXMAN 0791 LUXMAN STEREO TUNER 0791 LUXOR 0001, 0061, 0181, 0341, 0421, 0451, 0461, 0491, 0601, 0671, 1351, 1371, 1561, 1601, 1911, 1921, 1981 LYCO 1181 MAGNADYNE 0021, 0061, 0261, 0581, 0641, 0771, 1021, 1081, 1621, 1981 MAGNAFON 0261, 0491, 0581, 0591, 0641, 0761, 1091, 2001 MANESTH 0101 MARANTZ 0101 MARELLI 1081 MARK 0101 MATSUI 0061, 0451, 0601, 0691, 1101, 1151, 1241, 1271, 1301, 1511, 1561, 1681, 1691 MAXIMAL 0071, 1981 MCMICHAEL 1281 MEDION 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2671, 2681, 2691, 2711, 2721, 2761, 2771, 2781 MEMOREX 1511 METZ 0231, 0741, 1001, 1041, 1081, 1481, 2071, 2081 MGA 1231 MICROMAXX 2591, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 MINERVA 0221, 0231, 0491, 1381, 2141, 2151 MISTRAL 2281 MITSUBISHI 0141, 0201, 0231, 0661, 1191, 1201, 1231, 1671, 1691, 1741 MIVAR 0491, 0501, 0581, 0591, 0761, 0771, 1371, 1431, 2031 MTC 0791 MULTITECH 0261, 0581, 0601, 0641, 0981, 1321, 1511 MURPHY 0451, 2091 MURPHY (UK) 0081, 1031 N.E.I. 0101, 0961 NAD 1341 NEC 0141, 1711, 1721, 1731 NEDIATOR NICAMAGIC NIKKAI 0451, 0601, 0981, 1081, 1561, 1931, 1981, 2211, 2231, 2241 0101 0761 1101, 1331, 1641, 1701, 2011 NOBLIKO 0261, 0491, 0591, 0641, 1381, 1411 NOGAMATIC 0571 NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431, 2461, 2791 NORDMENDE 0031, 0291, 0331, 0451, 0531, 0541, 0571, 1051, 1131, 1591, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2631 OCEANIC 0321, 1651, 1981 OCEANIC (F) 0031, 0061, 0321, 0441, 1661 ONCEAS 0601 ONWA 1171 ORION 0061, 0391, 0691, 0851, 1211, 1241, 1251, 1301, 1481, 1511, 1681, 1691, 1981, 2371, 2421 OSAKA 2011 OSAKI 1101, 1331, 2011 OSUME 0151 OTTO VERSAND 0021, 0121, 0141, 0221, 0601, 1561, 1741, 1981 PAEL 0591, 1411 PANASONIC 0031, 0201, 0211, 0451, 0701, 1311, 1751, 1961, 2561, 2741 PANORAMIC 2351 PATHE MARCONI 0571 PATHE’ CINEMA (F) 0431, 0591, 1621, 1661, 1971 PAUSA 1511 PAUZA 1511 PERDIO 0891, 1101 PHILCO 0021, 0491, 0811, 0981, 1021, 1081, 1401, 1611, 1621, 1751, 2201, 2251, 2271, 2451, 2471 PHILIPS 0101, 0361, 0591, 0621, 0681, 0751, 0761, 1021, 1081, 1281, 2031, 2281, 2291, 2431, 2441, 2511, 2731 PHOENIX 1081 PHONOLA 0751, 1081 PIONEER 0291, 0451, 1341, 1821 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0411, 0451, 0491, 0581, 1411 PRANDONI-PROMCE 0451, 0491, 0581 PRIMA PROFEX PROTECH QUELLE 0451 1981 0641, 1181, 1981 0041, 0061, 0121, 0221, 0231, 0391, 0491, 0521, 0601, 0781, 1371, 1381, 1411, 1421, 1641, 1681, 2051, 2091, 2141, 2151, 2201, 2211, 2231, 2241, 2251, 2271, 2551, 2571, 2581 REDIOMARELLI 0101, 0451, 0661, 0771, 1081 RADIONETTE 0031, 2051, 2091 RADIOLA 2291 RANK 0481, 2151 RBM 2131, 2151 RBM (UK) 0481 REDIFFUSION 0451, 0661, 1641, 1981, 2331 REDIFFUSION (UK) 0061, 0081, 1031 REX 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 RFT 0991, 2511 ROADSTAR 1321, 1511 ROTEL 0151 SABA 0291, 0331, 0421, 0451, 0531, 0541, 0571, 0581, 0651, 0731, 0931, 1021, 1071, 1081, 1131, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2631 SACCS 1971 SAISHO 0451, 0601, 1161, 1241, 1301, 1511, 1671, 1681, 1691 SALORA 0011, 0041, 0061, 0071, 0341, 0451, 0671, 1291, 1351, 1521, 1561, 1601, 1641, 1911, 1921, 1931, 1981, 2321 SAMBERS 0261, 0491, 0581, 0641, 1091, 1371, 1411, 2001 SAMSUNG 0101, 0601, 0841, 0981, 1101, 1181, 1371, 1511, 2011 SANYO 0141, 0151, 0401, 0601, 0801, 0821, 0981, 1021, 1101, 1111, 1291, 1351, 1691, 1741, 2051, 2091, 2551 SBR 0681, 0751, 1281, 2281 SCHAUB LORENZ 0451 SCHNEIDER 0021, 0071, 0091, 0451, 0511, 0591, 0601, 0751, 1321, 1361, 1621, 1641, 2101, 2111, 2291 SCOTT 1171, 1261 SEG 0261, 0601, 0821, 0991 SEI 0641, 0691, 1081, 1301, 1481, 1981 ii 08V596RDS_code(EU) 2 2/29/0, 7:00 PM SELECO 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 SENTRA 1601 SHARP 0141, 0151, 0191, 1761, 1781 SIAREM 0021, 0261, 0581, 0641, 1021, 1081, 1981 SICATEL 1971 SIEMENS 0151, 0221, 0231, 0451, 0741, 2011, 2201, 2211, 2221, 2231, 2241, 2261, 2571, 2581 SILVER 1181 SINGER 0021, 0261, 1021, 1081 SINUDYNE 0021, 0061, 0101, 0261, 0391, 0641, 0691, 0851, 0941, 1021, 1081, 1241, 1301, 1321, 1481, 1631, 1981 SKANTIC 0451 SOLAVOX 0451, 1641, 2011 SONOKO 0101, 1181, 1511 SONY 0141, 0171, 1121, 1681, 1691, 2751 SOUNDESIGN 1171 SSS 1171 STERN 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 SUNKAI 0691 SUPRA 0791 TANDBERG 0161, 0331, 0611, 1021, 1421, 1771, 1791, 2081 TANDY 0191, 0451, 1331, 1531 TASHIKO 0141 TATUNG 0271, 0581, 0601, 0971, 1101, 1681, 1691 TCM 2621, 2641, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 TECHNICS 1311 TECHWOOD 0791 TEKNIKA 1171, 1231, 1261 TELE 1141 TELEAVIA 0571, 0651, 0731, 1821 TELEFUNKEN 0291, 0301, 0311, 0551, 0731, 1131, 1471, 1591, 1791, 1801, 1811, 1821, 1991, 2161, 2171, 2181, 2191, 2201, 2251, 2271, 2521, 2631 TELETECH 1511 TEMPEST 2381, 2391, 2401, 2411 TENSAI 1331, 2091 TEXET 0601 THOMSON 0331, 0481, 0531, 0571, 0631, 0651, 0731, 0901, 1241, 1571, 1591, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2531 THORN 0741, 0861, 2091, 2251, 2271, 2281 THORN-FERGUSON 0281, 0371, 0551, 0651, 0781, 0861, 0881, 1131, 1181, 1361, 1461, 1971, 1991, 2281 TMK 0141, 0791, 1471 TOSHIBA 0141, 0381, 0481, 1221, 1271, 1701, 1741, 1851, 2151, 2801, 2811 TRANS CONTINENS 0451 TRISTAR 2281 TRIUMPH 0481, 0581, 2121 UHER 0431, 0451, 0481, 0491, 0511, 1311, 1541 ULTRAVOX 0021, 0261, 0591, 1021, 1081, 1981 UNIVERSUM 1181, 2051 UNIVOX 1971 VEGAVOX 0811 VEXA 0101, 1511 VICTOR 1441, 1591 VIDEOTON 2481 VORTEC 0101, 0651 VOXSON 0411, 0451, 0491, 1021, 1081 WALTHAM 0451 WATSON 0431, 2201, 2241 WATT RADIO 0021, 0061, 0261, 0591, 0641, 0761, 1091, 1971, 1981, 2001 WEGA 0141, 1081, 1981 WEGA COLOR 1021 WELTBLICK 0101 WESTON 1621 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0101, 0261, 0431, 0591, 0761, 1401, 1541 YOKO 0601, 1511 ZANUSSI 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 ZOPPAS 0451 SATELLITE TUNER AKAI ALBA AMSTRAD 1276 0826, 1276 0166, 0796, 1016, 1026, 1296 ANKARO 0476 AST 0406 ASTRA 0126 BARCOM 0476 BLAUPUNKT 0966 BMC SATELLITE 0106 BRITISH TELECOM 1276 BUSH 0826 BUSH (UK) 0956 CAMBRIDGE 0196, 1276 CANAL PLUS (FRANCE) 1536 CHAPARRAL 0016, 0696, 1006 COLUMBUS 0616 CONNEXIONS 0306, 0426 DISCUS ELIPSE 0856, 0866 DISKXPRESS 0426, 0476 DRAKE 1516 ECHOSTAR 0226, 0236, 0606, 0626, 0666, 0926, 0996, 1046, 1056, 1066, 1106 ELTA 1286 ELTA SAT 0146 EURODEC 1226, 1236, 1246 FERGUSON 0046, 0176, 0186, 0296, 0846, 0956, 1306 FINLUX 0976 FRACARRO 0026, 0536, 0776 FUBA 0476, 0616, 0636, 1056 GIUCAR RECORD 0206, 0336 GRUNDIG 0176, 0946, 0956, 0966 HIGH PERFORMANCE 0916 HIRSCHMANN 0756, 0966 HITACHI 0446, 0516, 0706, 0946 ICX INTERNATIONAL 0886 ITT 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156 ITT/NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156 JEEMON 0146 JERROLD 0846, 0986 JOHANSSON 0246 JVC 1276 KATHREIN 0116, 0266, 0276, 0366 KOSMOS 0266 KYOSTAR 1036, 1086 LENG 0246 LIFESAT 1326, 1346, 1356 LUXOR 0126, 0136, 0446, 0466, 0506, 1156 MACAB 0356 MASPRO 0016, 0116, 0256, 0956 MEDION 1326, 1346 METZ 0966 MICROMAXX 1326, 1346 MITSUBISHI 0966 MORGANS 0596 MURATTO 0406 NEC 0286, 0316, 0766, 0786, 0836 NETWORK 0046 NIKKO 1136, 1146 CABLE TV CABLETIME 1446, 1456, 1476 CLYDE CABLEVISION 1426 FILMNET 1396, 1436 FRANCE TELECOM 1386 GEC 1426 JERROLD 1416 MOVIE TIME 1466 NSC 1466 PHILIPS 1386 PIONEER 0006 SAMSUNG 1496 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 1486, 1506 STARCOM 1416 STS 1466 TANDBERG 1366 TELE 1436 TELE +1 1436 TELESERVICE 1406, 1476 TUDI 1376 UNITED CABLE 1416 ZENITH 1406 NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156, 1166, 1336 NORSAT 0786 OTTO VERSAND 0966 PACE 0046, 0176, 0296, 0936, 0956, 1306, 1566, 1576 PACE MSS 0946 PALCOM 0616, 0686, 0706 PALSAT 0396 PALTEC 0706 PANASONIC 0806, 1306 PANSAT 1076 PHILIPS 0326, 0346, 0476, 0956, 1126, 1186, 1196, 1206, 1216, 1306, 1316 PROSAT 1176 PTT TELECOM 0306, 0896 QUELLE 0966 RADIX 1056 REDIFFUSION 0316, 0786 RFT 1186, 1196, 1206, 1216 SAGEM 1256, 1546 SAKURA 0566, 0816 SALORA 0066, 0126, 0136, 0446, 0456, 0486, 0496, 0576 SAMSUNG 0746, 0756 SAT 0406 SATCOM 0896 SATECO 0646 SECTOR 1266 SEDEA 1096 SENTRA 0416 SIEMENS 0896, 0966 SINTRACK 0906 SKY DIGITAL BOX 1526 SKYLAB 0476 SKYSCAN 0876 SONY 0736, 0946 STELLA 0306 STRONG 0156, 0396, 1036, 1086 STV 0636 TANDBERG 1116 TANDY 0916 TANTEC 0616 TATUNG 0516, 0546 TECHNISAT 0086, 0096, 0526, 0556, 1056 TELECOM 0306 TELEMAX 0586 THORN-FERGUSON 0046, 0076, 0176, 0186, 0956 TOSHIBA 0946 TPS (FRANCE) 1546 TRIAD 0406 UNIDEN 0036, 0216, 0676, 0716, 0726 US ELECTRONICS 0886 VORTEC 0756, 1036, 1076 VTECH 0436 WINERSAT 0246 WISI 0056, 0356, 0376, 0386, 0406, 0656, 1056, 1156 WOLSEY 0916 XCOM MULTIMEDIA 1556 XSAT (FRANCE) 1556 ZEHNDER 0266, 0406 ZENDER 0406 VCR AIWA AKAI 0042, 0352, 0432 0042, 0422, 0492, 0582, 0612, 0642, 0652, 0762, 0912 ALBA 0002, 0112, 0282, 0332, 0342, 0972 AMSTRAD 0322, 0432, 0452 ANITECH 0002 ANITSCH 1002 ASA 0012, 0052 AUDIOSONIC 0002 BAIRD 0042, 0282, 0492 BANG & OLUFSEN 0042 BAUR 0052, 0062, 0812 BLAUPUNKT 0062, 0092, 0252, 0462, 0672, 0992 BRIONVEGA 0032 BUSH 0002, 0282, 0332, 0342, 0512, 0972 BUSH (UK) 0812 CAPEHART 0112 CGE 0042, 0432, 0762 CRAIG 0072, 0482 CROWN 0112, 0282, 0622 DAEWOO 0112, 0282, 0622 DANSAI 0012 DAYTRON 0112 DECCA 0042, 0052, 0432, 0942 DECCA (UK) 0052 DEGRAAF 0052, 0132, 0432, 0532, 0602 DIXI 0442 DUAL 0042, 0632 DUMONT 0052, 0432, 0532 DYNATECH 0432 DYNATRON 0012 ELBE 0122 ELIN 0072 EMERSON 0012, 0162, 0202, 0432, 0512, 0522 ERRES 0012 FERGUSON 0042, 0712, 0722, 0852, 0902, 1012, 1022, 1082 FIDELITY 0432 FINLANDIA 0052, 0532 FINLUX 0012, 0042, 0052, 0082, 0262, 0382, 0432, 0462, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0602, 0912 FIRST LINE 0002, 0912 FISHER 0162, 0482, 0532, 0542, 0572, 0592 FORMENTI-PHOENIX 0012, 0052 FRONTECH 0112 FUNAI 0432 GBC 0002 GEC (UK) 0022, 0052 GELOSO 0002 GENERAL TECHNIC 1172 GOLDSTAR 0012, 0122, 0812, 0952 GOODMANS 0002, 0072, 0282, 0432, 0502 GOODMANS (UK) 0002 GRAETZ 0022, 0042 GRANADA 0052, 0132, 0532, 0572 GRANADA (UK) 0052, 0092, 0462, 0602, 0812, 0822 iii 08V596RDS_code(EU) 3 2/29/0, 7:00 PM NORDMENDE 0042, 0102, 0142, 0192, 0222, 0242, 0392, 0402, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0792, 0832, 0842, 0872 OLYMPUS 0462 OPTONICA 0132, 0502 ORION 0162, 0202, 0312, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0982 OSAKA 0432 OSAKI 0002, 0012, 0432 OTTO VERSAND 0052, 0062, 0812 PANASONIC 0022, 0212, 0462, 0672, 0992, 1092, 1102, 1182 PENTAX 0172, 0602 PERDIO 0432 PHILCO 1062 PHILIPS 0052, 0082, 0092, 0152, 0182, 0362, 0372, 0382, 0472, 0502, 1072 PHONOLA 0052, 0152 PILOT 0012 PIONEER 0052, 0142, 0372, 0472 PORTLAND 0112 PROLINE 0432 PYE 0052, 0152 QUARTZ 0572 QUELLE 0012, 0032, 0042, 0052, 0062, 0072, 0092, 0202, 0462, 0522, 0942 RADIONETTE 0022 REALISTIC 0012, 0072, 0132, 0432, 0482, 0502, 0532, 0572 RET 1072 REX 0042, 0742, 0782 RICOH 0952 SABA 0042, 0142, 0192, 0222, 0242, 0392, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0772, 0782, 0792, 0872 SAISHO 0162, 0202, 0292, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0972 SALORA 0192, 0572, 0812, 0822, 0912 SAMSUNG 0052, 0072, 0622, 0652, 1192 SANSUI 0042, 0142 SANYO 0482, 0532, 0562, 0572 SBR 0052, 0152, 0182 SCHAUB LORENZ 0022, 0042 SCHNEIDER 0002, 0012, 0052, 0072, 0432 SEG 0002, 0072 SEI-SINUDYNE 0442 SELECO 0042 SENTRA 0112 SHARP 0132, 0502, 0702 SHINTOM 0002 SIEMENS 0062, 0092, 0252, 0572 SINUDYNE 0052, 0382, 0442, 0932 SONOKO 0282 GRUNDIG 0052, 0062, 0092, 0232, 0252, 0262, 0752, 0802 HANSEATIC 0052, 0812 HARMAN/KARDON 0122, 0922 HCM 0002 HINARI 0002, 0202, 0412, 0442, 0522 HITACHI 0042, 0172, 0292, 0432, 0602, 0662, 0812, 1022 IMPERIAL 0072, 0432 INGERSOL 0442 INNO HIT 0002, 0052, 0072 INNOVATION 1142, 1162, 1172 INTERFUNK 0022, 0052 IRRADIO 0002, 0012 ITT 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762 ITT-NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762 JENSEN 0042 JVC 0042, 0102, 0142, 0272, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0902 KARCHER 0052, 0072, 0812 KENDO 0492 KENWOOD 0042, 0142, 0572 LIFETEC 1142, 1162, 1172 LLOYD 0432 LOEWE OPTA 0052, 0092, 0152 LOGIK 0002, 0072, 0442 LUMA 0162 LUXOR 0492, 0572, 0812 M ELECTRONIC 0432 MAGNADYNE 0052 MAGNASONIC 0572 MANESTH 0012 MARANTZ 0012, 0052, 0092, 0122, 0502 MARK 0012 MARTA 0012 MATSUI 0012, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0812, 0972 MEDION 1142, 1162, 1172 MEMOREX 0012, 0132, 0432, 0482, 0532, 0572 METZ 0062, 0092, 0932 MGA 0912 MICROMAXX 1142, 1162, 1172 MINERVA 0062, 0092, 0252 MINOLTA 0172, 0602 MITSUBISHI 0052, 0062, 0142, 0912, 0922 MTC 0072, 0432 MULTITECH 0002, 0052, 0062, 0282, 0432 MURPHY 0432 N.E.I. 0012, 0052 NATIONAL 0462 NEC 0042, 0122, 0142, 1202 NECKERMANN 0032, 0042, 0052, 0072, 0092, 0202, 0522, 0572, 0762, 0812 NIKKAI 0112 NOBLIKO 0092 NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762, 1152 SONY 0432, 0552, 0682, 0692, 0942, 0952, 0962, 1122, 1132 STS 0602 SUNKAI 0512 SUNSTAR 0432 SYLVANIA 0432, 0912 SYMPHONIC 0432, 0912 TANDBERG 0062, 0162, 0522, 0932 TASHIKO 0132, 0432 TATUNG 0042, 0052, 0432, 0922 TCM 1142, 1162, 1172 TEAC 0042, 0432 TECHNICS 0462 TEKNIKA 0012, 0432 TELEFUNKEN 0042, 0192, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0882, 0892 TEMPEST 1032, 1042, 1052 TENOSAL 0002 THOMSON 0042, 0102, 0142, 0192, 0402, 0632, 0762 THORN 0042, 0902 THORN-FERGUSON 0042, 0222, 0302, 0712, 0722, 0742, 0762, 0852, 0862, 0872, 0902 TMK 0522 TONSAI 0002 TOSHIBA 0042, 0622, 0912, 1212 TOTEVISION 0012, 0072 TRIUMPH 0922 UHER 0042, 0072 ULTRAVOX 0032 UNITECH 0072 VECTOR RESEARCH 0122 VICTOR 0042, 0102, 0142 VIDEON 1162, 1172 WELTBLICK 0012 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0032 XENON 0162 YOKO 0012, 0062, 0072 DVD PLAYER AKAI JVC KENWOOD MAGNAVOX MITSUBISHI ONKYO PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER PROSCAN RCA SAMSUNG SHARP SONY TECHNICS THOMSON TOSHIBA YAMAHA ZENITH 0108 0168, 0348 0288 0248 0268 0128, 0248 0048 0188, 0248 0208, 0228 0308 0308 0148 0068 0028 0048 0328 0088, 0248 0008, 0048 0248 iv 08V596RDS_code(EU) 4 2/29/0, 7:00 PM LD PLAYER AIWA FUNAI HITACHI MAGNAVOX PANASONIC PIONEER RCA REALISTIC SAMSUNG SONY VICTOR YAMAHA 0137 0137 0047 0077 0027 0037 0067 0137 0017, 0087 0057, 0097, 0107, 0117 0127 0007 CD PLAYER ACCUPHASE ADC ADCOM AKAI 0315 0865 0785, 1015 0115, 0125, 0725, 0735, 0745, 0935, 1155 ARCAM 1875 ARCAM-ROTEL 0165 AUDIO-TECHNICA 0835 AUDIOSONIC 0155 AIWA 1105, 1235, 1245, 1765, 1915, 1935 BSR 0875 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB 1075 CARRERA 0555, 0875 CARVER 0825, 1415 CYRUS-ROTEL 0205 DENON 0045, 0955, 1045, 1595, 1795, 1805 DUAL 1005 ELIN 0185 EMERSON 1015, 1285, 1675 FISHER 0105, 0595, 0605, 0825, 1165, 1175 GENEXXA 0525, 0825, 0855, 0875, 0995, 1265, 1285, 1345, 1355, 1485, 1575, 1675, 1715, 1825 GOLDSTAR 0555, 1185, 1195, 1585 GRUNDIG 0175 HARMAN KARDON 0325, 0495, 0565, 1135, 1145, 1155 HITACHI 0065, 0585, 0685, 0945, 1005, 1015, 1225, 1545 INNOVATION 1995, 2005, 2015 ITT-NOKIA 0185 JVC 0385, 0395, 0455, 0575, 0585 KARCHER 0485 KENWOOD 0025, 0055, 0145, 0215, 0595, 0675, 0695, 0705, 0715, 0925, 1355, 1485, 1575, 1675, 1715, 1825 KORTING 0175 LIFETEC 2015 LIGHT CONTROL 1155, 1645, 1655, 1665 LINN 0165, 1875 LUXMAN 0265, 0275, 0795, 0805, 1295, 1305, 1555, 1925 THOMSON 1005 TOSHIBA 0755, 0765 VECTOR RESEARCH 0555, 0865 VICTOR 0575 YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 1815 LUXOR MAGNAVOX MARANTZ 0185, 1895, 1905 1865, 1875 0165, 0175, 0545, 0665, 1275, 1335, 1405, 1505, 1875, 1955 MATSUSHITA 1095, 1605 MCS 0535 MEDION 0075, 1995, 2005, 2015 MEMOREX 0525, 1015, 1265, 1275, 1285, 1675 MGA 1125 MICROMAXX 2015 MISSION 0165, 1875 MITSUBISHI 1125, 1205 NAD 0135, 0255, 0285, 0295, 0305, 0345, 0755, 0765, 1315, 1325 NAKAMICHI 0635, 0645, 1565 NEC 0405, 0535, 0775, 0785 NECKERMAN 0155, 0225 NIKKO 0835, 1165 OCEANIC 0185 OKANO 0155, 0225 ONKYO 0885, 1385, 1425, 1455, 1515 PANASONIC 1055, 1075, 1615, 1625 PHILIPS 0165, 0175, 0195, 1865, 1875 PIONEER 0095, 0335, 0425, 0435, 0445, 0525, 0855, 1035, 1945 PROTON 0905, 1875 QUASAR 1075 RADIOLA 1845, 1855 RADIOTONE 0485 REALISTIC 0825, 1015, 1265, 1275, 1285, 1575 ROTEL 1875 SABA 1005 SAE 1875 SALORA 0185 SANSUI 0415, 0965, 0975, 0985, 1255, 1675, 1875 SANYO 0625, 0825, 0845, 0915 SCHNEIDER 1845, 1855 SCOTT 1285, 1675 SHARP 0025, 0035, 1025, 1115, 1275, 1635, 1785, 1815, 1825, 1835 SHERWOOD 1275, 1445 SIEMENS 1085 SIGNATURE 1155 SONY 0345, 0355, 0365, 0375, 0865, 1685, 1695, 1705, 1715, 1725, 1735, 1745 SYLVANIA 1875 TANDBERG 1885 TASHIKO 1525 TCM 1985, 2015 TEAC 0235, 0245, 1275, 1365, 1375, 1395, 1435, 1465, 1475 TECHNICS 0465, 0475, 1065, 1075, 1625 TELEFUNKEN 1005 THETA DIGITAL 1865 MD RECORDER YAMAHA KENWOOD SONY 0024, 0224 0214 0224 TAPE DECK AKAI DENON GRUNDIG HARMAN JVC KENWOOD KORTING LUXMAN MARANTZ NAD ONKYO PHILIPS PIONEER SONY YAMAHA 0124 0204 0134 0044 0194 0164 0134 0054, 0064, 0074, 0084 0134, 0144 0174 0184 0134, 0144, 0154 0034, 0114 0094, 0104 0004, 0014 v 08V596RDS_code(EU) 5 2/29/0, 7:00 PM GB RX-V596RDS YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 00RX-V596RDS-cv(ML) 1 RX-V596RDS Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING Printed in Malaysia ID V471930-1 9/29/0, 10:07 AM Quick Reference Card AMP/TUN DSP DSP/TUN DSP INPUT INPUT Input selector buttons DSP program selector A/B/C/D/E EFFECT PRESET +/– TEST j (left), i (right) d (next), u (back) SET MENU TIME/LEVEL STANDBY TV POWER POWER VOLUME +/– TV VOLUME DSP program selector TV INPUT SLEEP MUTE Input selector buttons EFFECT TAPE/MD DSP CD INPUT DSP INPUT Numeric buttons Numeric buttons (MD) +10 (MD) DECK A/B (TAPE) DISPLAY (MD) PAUSE (MD) REC/PAUSE PLAY DIR A (TAPE) SKIP– (MD) REWIND (TAPE) SEARCH (MD) DIR B (TAPE) SKIP+ (MD) STOP FAST FORWARD (TAPE) SEARCH (MD) AV POWER INDEX +10 DISC SKIP+/– PLAY SKIP– SEARCH DISPLAY PAUSE SKIP+ STOP SEARCH AV POWER V479260 Quick Reference Card DVD/LD DVD MENU INPUT DSP INPUT DSP Numeric buttons Numeric buttons TITLE/INDEX +10 TITLE/INDEX +10 DISC SKIP+/– DISC SKIP+/– DISPLAY PAUSE PLAY SKIP– RETURN MENU SELECT SKIP+ STOP SEARCH DISPLAY MENU UP MENU LEFT MENU RIGHT TITLE MENU DOWN MENU SEARCH AV POWER TV VCR DSP AV POWER INPUT INPUT DSP Numeric buttons CHANNEL +/– ENTER/ RECALL VCR REC PLAY DISPLAY PAUSE DSP Numeric buttons ENTER/ RECALL CHANNEL +/– *1 VCR REC VCR PLAY DISPLAY VCR PAUSE CHANNEL +/– MENU SELECT MENU LEFT VCR REWIND VCR STOP VCR FAST FORWARD TV POWER TV INPUT TV VOL TV SLEEP STOP REWIND FAST FORWARD AV POWER INPUT Numeric buttons +10 +10 *1 CBL/SAT RECALL VCR POWER ENTER +10 DISPLAY/ GUIDE (SAT) MENU UP MENU RIGHT MENU DOWN MENU AV POWER TV MUTE *1 Press this button twice to start recording. Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour commencer l’enregistrement. Drücken Sie diese Taste zweimal, um die Aufnahme zu starten. Tryck två gånger på den här knappen för att börja spela in. Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione. Presione dos veces este botón para empezar a grabar. Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen. V479260 DVD player L R COAXIAL VIDEO OUT ANALOG AUDIO OUT L R DIGITAL OUT S VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S VIDEO OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT DOLBY DIGITAL RF OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Main speakers B DOLBY DIGITAL RF OUT R DOLBY DIGITAL RF IN L R L RF demodulator C V O COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT S C A B S (Europe model) V * * DSP-A5 only VIDEO IN L S VIDEO IN Analog signal S Video signal S AUDIO OUT Main speakers A LD player R V O TV Monitor Subwoofer system R Center speaker L Rear speakers C Digital signal (optical) Digital signal (coaxial) Video signal Signal flow V573050 RX-V596/DSP-A5
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70

Yamaha RX-V596RDS El manual del propietario

Categoría
Receptor
Tipo
El manual del propietario